1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2%
3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5%
6\def\texinfoversion{2006-02-13.16}
7%
8% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free
10% Software Foundation, Inc.
11%
12% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
15% your option) any later version.
16%
17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
20% General Public License for more details.
21%
22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
24% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
25% Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
26%
27% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
28% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
29% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
30%
31% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
32% reports; you can get the latest version from:
33%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
34%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
35%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
36% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
37% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
38%
39% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
40% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
41% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
42%
43% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
44% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
45% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
46%   tex foo.texi
47%   texindex foo.??
48%   tex foo.texi
49%   tex foo.texi
50%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
51% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
52% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
53% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
54%
55% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
56% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
57% full Texinfo distribution.
58%
59% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
60
61
62\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
63
64% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
65% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
66% they might have appeared in the input file name.
67\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
68  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
69
70\message{Basics,}
71\chardef\other=12
72
73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
75\let\+ = \relax
76
77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
78\let\ptexb=\b
79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
80\let\ptexc=\c
81\let\ptexcomma=\,
82\let\ptexdot=\.
83\let\ptexdots=\dots
84\let\ptexend=\end
85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
86\let\ptexexclam=\!
87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
88\let\ptexgtr=>
89\let\ptexhat=^
90\let\ptexi=\i
91\let\ptexindent=\indent
92\let\ptexinsert=\insert
93\let\ptexlbrace=\{
94\let\ptexless=<
95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
97\let\ptexplus=+
98\let\ptexrbrace=\}
99\let\ptexslash=\/
100\let\ptexstar=\*
101\let\ptext=\t
102
103% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
104% starts a new line in the output.
105\newlinechar = `^^J
106
107% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
108% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
109%
110\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
111  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
112\else
113  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
114\fi
115
116% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
117\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
118\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
119\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
120\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
121\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
122\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
123\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
124\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
125\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
126\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
127\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
128\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
129\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
130\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
131\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
132\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
133\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
134\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
135\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
136%
137\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
138\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
139\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
140\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
141\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
142\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
143\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
144\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
145\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
146\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
147\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
148\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
149%
150\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
151\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
152\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
153\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
154\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
155
156% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
157\chardef\spacecat = 10
158\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
159
160% Ignore a token.
161%
162\def\gobble#1{}
163
164% The following is used inside several \edef's.
165\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
166
167% Hyphenation fixes.
168\hyphenation{
169  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
170  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
171  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
172  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
173  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
174  spell-ing spell-ings
175  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
176  wide-spread wrap-around
177}
178
179% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
180\newdimen\bindingoffset
181\newdimen\normaloffset
182\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
183
184% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
185% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
186% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
187%
188\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
189
190% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
191% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
192% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
193% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
194% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
195%
196\def\|{%
197  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
198  \leavevmode
199  %
200  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
201  \vadjust{%
202    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
203    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
204    \vskip-\baselineskip
205    %
206    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
207    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
208    \llap{%
209      %
210      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
211      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
212      %
213      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
214      \hskip 12pt
215    }%
216  }%
217}
218
219% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
220% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
221% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
222% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
223% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
224%
225\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
226\def\loggingall{%
227  \tracingstats2
228  \tracingpages1
229  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
230  \tracingparagraphs1
231  \tracingoutput1
232  \tracingmacros2
233  \tracingrestores1
234  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
235  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
236    \tracingscantokens1
237    \tracingifs1
238    \tracinggroups1
239    \tracingnesting2
240    \tracingassigns1
241  \fi
242  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
243  \errorcontextlines16
244}%
245
246% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
247% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
248%
249\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
250  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
251\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
252  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
253\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
254  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
255
256% For @cropmarks command.
257% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
258%
259\newif\ifcropmarks
260\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
261%
262% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
263% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
264%
265\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
266\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
267\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
268\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
269
270% Main output routine.
271\chardef\PAGE = 255
272\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
273
274\newbox\headlinebox
275\newbox\footlinebox
276
277% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
278% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
279\def\onepageout#1{%
280  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
281  %
282  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
283  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
284  %
285  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
286  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
287  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
288  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
289  %
290  {%
291    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
292    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
293    % before the \shipout runs.
294    %
295    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
296    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
297               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
298               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
299               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
300               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
301               % it needs to be
302               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
303    \shipout\vbox{%
304      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
305      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
306      %
307      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
308        \hsize = \outerhsize
309        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
310        \vtop to0pt{%
311          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
312          \nointerlineskip
313          \line{%
314            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
315            \hfill
316            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
317          }%
318          \vss}%
319        \vskip\topandbottommargin
320        \line\bgroup
321          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
322          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
323          \vbox\bgroup
324      \fi
325      %
326      \unvbox\headlinebox
327      \pagebody{#1}%
328      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
329        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
330        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
331        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
332        \vskip 2\baselineskip
333        \unvbox\footlinebox
334      \fi
335      %
336      \ifcropmarks
337          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
338        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
339        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
340        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
341        \vbox to0pt{\vss
342          \line{%
343            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
344            \hfill
345            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
346          }%
347          \nointerlineskip
348          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
349        }%
350      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
351      \fi
352    }% end of \shipout\vbox
353  }% end of group with \indexdummies
354  \advancepageno
355  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
356}
357
358\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
359
360\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
361{\catcode`\@ =11
362\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
363% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
364\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
365  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
366\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
367\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
368\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
369}
370
371% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
372% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
373% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
374%
375\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
376\def\nstop{\vbox
377  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
378\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
379\def\nsbot{\vbox
380  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
381
382% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
383% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
384% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
385%
386\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
387\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
388  \def\next{#2}%
389  \begingroup
390    \obeylines
391    \spaceisspace
392    #1%
393    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
394}
395
396{\obeylines %
397  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
398    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
399    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
400  }%
401}
402
403% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
404\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
405\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
406
407% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
408%
409% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
410%    @end itemize  @c foo
411% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
412% by \finishparsearg.
413%
414\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
415\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
416\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
417  \def\temp{#3}%
418  \ifx\temp\empty
419    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
420    % thus we reuse \temp.
421    \let\temp\finishparsearg
422  \else
423    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
424  \fi
425  % Put the space token in:
426  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
427}
428
429% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
430% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
431% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
432% just before passing the control to \next.
433% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
434% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
435% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
436%
437% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
438%
439\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
440
441% \parseargdef\foo{...}
442%	is roughly equivalent to
443% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
444% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
445%
446% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
447% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
448
449\def\parseargdef#1{%
450  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
451}
452\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
453  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
454  \def#1##1%
455}
456
457% Several utility definitions with active space:
458{
459  \obeyspaces
460  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
461
462  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
463  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
464  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
465  % should produce a line of output anyway.
466  %
467  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
468
469  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
470  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
471  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
472  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
473}
474
475
476\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
477
478% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
479%
480%   \envdef\foo{...}
481%   \def\Efoo{...}
482%
483% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
484% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
485% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
486% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
487% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
488%
489% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
490% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
491% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
492% special case.)
493
494
495% At runtime, environments start with this:
496\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
497% initialize
498\let\thisenv\empty
499
500% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
501\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
502\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
503
504% Check whether we're in the right environment:
505\def\checkenv#1{%
506  \def\temp{#1}%
507  \ifx\thisenv\temp
508  \else
509    \badenverr
510  \fi
511}
512
513% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
514\def\badenverr{%
515  \errhelp = \EMsimple
516  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
517    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
518}
519\def\inenvironment#1{%
520  \ifx#1\empty
521    out of any environment%
522  \else
523    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
524  \fi
525}
526
527% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
528% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
529%
530\parseargdef\end{%
531  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
532  \else
533    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
534    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
535    \csname E#1\endcsname
536    \endgroup
537  \fi
538}
539
540\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
541
542
543%% Simple single-character @ commands
544
545% @@ prints an @
546% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
547\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
548
549% This is turned off because it was never documented
550% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
551%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
552%% but suppressing ligatures.
553%\def\`{{`}}
554%\def\'{{'}}
555
556% Used to generate quoted braces.
557\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
558\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
559\let\{=\mylbrace
560\let\}=\myrbrace
561\begingroup
562  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
563  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
564  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
565  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
566  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
567  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
568  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
569  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
570  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
571!endgroup
572
573% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
574\let\comma = ,
575
576% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
577% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
578\let\, = \c
579\let\dotaccent = \.
580\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
581\let\tieaccent = \t
582\let\ubaraccent = \b
583\let\udotaccent = \d
584
585% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
586% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
587\def\questiondown{?`}
588\def\exclamdown{!`}
589\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
590\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
591
592% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
593\def\imacro{i}
594\def\jmacro{j}
595\def\dotless#1{%
596  \def\temp{#1}%
597  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
598  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
599  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
600  \fi\fi
601}
602
603% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
604% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
605%
606\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
607
608% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
609% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
610% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
611% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
612% \scriptscriptstyle).
613%
614\def\LaTeX{%
615  L\kern-.36em
616  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
617   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
618  \kern-.15em
619  \TeX
620}
621
622% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
623% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
624% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
625% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
626% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
627{\catcode`@ = 11
628 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
629 % if the definition is written into an index file.
630 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
631 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
632}
633
634% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
635\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
636
637% @* forces a line break.
638\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
639
640% @/ allows a line break.
641\let\/=\allowbreak
642
643% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
644\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
645
646% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
647\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
648
649% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
650\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
651
652% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
653%
654\def\onword{on}
655\def\offword{off}
656%
657\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
658  \def\temp{#1}%
659  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
660  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
661  \else
662    \errhelp = \EMsimple
663    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
664  \fi\fi
665}
666
667% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
668% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
669% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
670\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
671
672% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
673% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
674% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
675% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
676% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
677% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
678% the text is small, which looks bad.
679%
680% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
681% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
682% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
683% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
684% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
685% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
686%
687\newbox\groupbox
688\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
689%
690\envdef\group{%
691  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
692    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
693    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
694  \fi
695  \startsavinginserts
696  %
697  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
698    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
699    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
700    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
701    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
702    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
703    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
704    \comment
705}
706%
707% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
708% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
709% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
710% above.  But it's pretty close.
711\def\Egroup{%
712    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
713    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
714    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
715    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
716  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
717  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
718  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
719  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
720  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
721  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
722  % group, force a page break.
723  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
724    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
725      \page
726    \fi
727  \fi
728  \box\groupbox
729  \prevdepth = \dimen1
730  \checkinserts
731}
732%
733% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
734% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
735%
736\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
737group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
738where each line of input produces a line of output.}
739
740% @need space-in-mils
741% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
742
743\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
744
745% Old definition--didn't work.
746%\parseargdef\need{\par %
747%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
748%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
749%{\baselineskip=0pt%
750%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
751%\prevdepth=-1000pt
752%}}
753
754\parseargdef\need{%
755  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
756  % paragraph.
757  \par
758  %
759  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
760  \dimen0 = #1\mil
761  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
762  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
763  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
764    %
765    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
766    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
767    % And a page break here is fine.
768    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
769    %
770    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
771    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
772    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
773    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
774    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
775    %
776    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
777    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
778    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
779    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
780    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
781    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
782    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
783    \penalty9999
784    %
785    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
786    \kern -#1\mil
787    %
788    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
789    \nobreak
790  \fi
791}
792
793% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
794
795\let\br = \par
796
797% @page forces the start of a new page.
798%
799\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
800
801% @exdent text....
802% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
803
804% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
805% That's how much \exdent should take out.
806\newskip\exdentamount
807
808% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
809\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
810
811% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
812\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
813  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
814
815% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
816% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
817% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
818%
819\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
820\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
821%
822\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
823  \nobreak
824  \kern-\strutdepth
825  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
826    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
827    \vss
828    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
829    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
830    \ifx#1l%
831      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
832    \else
833      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
834    \fi
835    \null
836  }%
837}}
838\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
839\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
840%
841% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
842% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
843% else use TEXT for both).
844%
845\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
846\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
847  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
848  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
849    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
850    \def\righttext{#2}%
851  \else
852    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
853    \def\righttext{#1}%
854  \fi
855  %
856  \ifodd\pageno
857    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
858  \else
859    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
860  \fi
861  \temp
862}
863
864% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
865%
866\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
867\def\includezzz#1{%
868  \pushthisfilestack
869  \def\thisfile{#1}%
870  {%
871    \makevalueexpandable
872    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
873    \expandafter
874  }\temp
875  \popthisfilestack
876}
877\def\filenamecatcodes{%
878  \catcode`\\=\other
879  \catcode`~=\other
880  \catcode`^=\other
881  \catcode`_=\other
882  \catcode`|=\other
883  \catcode`<=\other
884  \catcode`>=\other
885  \catcode`+=\other
886  \catcode`-=\other
887}
888
889\def\pushthisfilestack{%
890  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
891}
892\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
893  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
894}
895\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
896  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
897}
898
899\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
900\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
901  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
902
903\def\thisfile{}
904
905% @center line
906% outputs that line, centered.
907%
908\parseargdef\center{%
909  \ifhmode
910    \let\next\centerH
911  \else
912    \let\next\centerV
913  \fi
914  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
915}
916\def\centerH#1{%
917  {%
918    \hfil\break
919    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
920    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
921    \line{#1}%
922    \break
923  }%
924}
925\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
926
927% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
928
929\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
930
931% @comment ...line which is ignored...
932% @c is the same as @comment
933% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
934
935\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
936\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
937\commentxxx}
938{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
939
940\let\c=\comment
941
942% @paragraphindent NCHARS
943% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
944% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
945% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
946%
947\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
948\def\noneword{none}
949%
950\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
951  \def\temp{#1}%
952  \ifx\temp\asisword
953  \else
954    \ifx\temp\noneword
955      \defaultparindent = 0pt
956    \else
957      \defaultparindent = #1em
958    \fi
959  \fi
960  \parindent = \defaultparindent
961}
962
963% @exampleindent NCHARS
964% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
965% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
966% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
967\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
968  \def\temp{#1}%
969  \ifx\temp\asisword
970  \else
971    \ifx\temp\noneword
972      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
973    \else
974      \lispnarrowing = #1em
975    \fi
976  \fi
977}
978
979% @firstparagraphindent WORD
980% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
981% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
982% paragraphs.
983%
984% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
985% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
986% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
987% By default, we suppress indentation.
988%
989\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
990\def\insertword{insert}
991%
992\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
993  \def\temp{#1}%
994  \ifx\temp\noneword
995    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
996  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
997    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
998  \else
999    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1000    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
1001  \fi\fi
1002}
1003
1004% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
1005% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
1006%
1007% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
1008% paragraph.
1009%
1010\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1011  \gdef\indent{%
1012    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1013    \indent
1014  }%
1015  \gdef\noindent{%
1016    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1017    \noindent
1018  }%
1019  \global\everypar = {%
1020    \kern -\parindent
1021    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1022  }%
1023}
1024
1025\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1026  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1027  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1028  \global \everypar = {}%
1029}
1030
1031
1032% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
1033%
1034\def\asis#1{#1}
1035
1036% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
1037%
1038% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
1039% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
1040% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
1041% which is what @var uses.
1042{
1043  \catcode`\_ = \active
1044  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
1045    \catcode`\_=\active
1046    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
1047  }
1048}
1049% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
1050% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
1051% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
1052% otherwise define @\.
1053%
1054% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
1055\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1056%
1057\def\math{%
1058  \tex
1059  \mathunderscore
1060  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
1061  \mathactive
1062  $\finishmath
1063}
1064\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
1065
1066% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
1067% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
1068% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
1069%
1070{
1071  \catcode`^ = \active
1072  \catcode`< = \active
1073  \catcode`> = \active
1074  \catcode`+ = \active
1075  \gdef\mathactive{%
1076    \let^ = \ptexhat
1077    \let< = \ptexless
1078    \let> = \ptexgtr
1079    \let+ = \ptexplus
1080  }
1081}
1082
1083% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
1084\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
1085\def\minus{$-$}
1086
1087% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
1088% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
1089% font as three actual period characters.
1090%
1091\def\dots{%
1092  \leavevmode
1093  \hbox to 1.5em{%
1094    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
1095    .\hfil.\hfil.%
1096    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
1097  }%
1098}
1099
1100% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1101%
1102\def\enddots{%
1103  \dots
1104  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
1105}
1106
1107% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
1108% Texinfo's parsing.
1109%
1110\let\comma = ,
1111
1112% @refill is a no-op.
1113\let\refill=\relax
1114
1115% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1116% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1117% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1118%
1119\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1120\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1121
1122% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1123% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1124% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1125\def\setfilename{%
1126   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1127   \iflinks
1128     \tryauxfile
1129     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1130     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1131   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1132   \openindices
1133   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1134   %
1135   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1136   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1137   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1138   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1139   \closein 1
1140   %
1141   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1142}
1143
1144% Called from \setfilename.
1145%
1146\def\openindices{%
1147  \newindex{cp}%
1148  \newcodeindex{fn}%
1149  \newcodeindex{vr}%
1150  \newcodeindex{tp}%
1151  \newcodeindex{ky}%
1152  \newcodeindex{pg}%
1153}
1154
1155% @bye.
1156\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1157
1158
1159\message{pdf,}
1160% adobe `portable' document format
1161\newcount\tempnum
1162\newcount\lnkcount
1163\newtoks\filename
1164\newcount\filenamelength
1165\newcount\pgn
1166\newtoks\toksA
1167\newtoks\toksB
1168\newtoks\toksC
1169\newtoks\toksD
1170\newbox\boxA
1171\newcount\countA
1172\newif\ifpdf
1173\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1174
1175% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1176% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
1177% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
1178\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
1179\else
1180  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1181  \else
1182    \ifcase\pdfoutput
1183    \else
1184      \pdftrue
1185    \fi
1186  \fi
1187\fi
1188
1189% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
1190% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
1191% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
1192% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
1193% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
1194% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
1195% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
1196% that's what we do).
1197
1198% double active backslashes.
1199%
1200{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
1201 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
1202   @catcode`@\=@active
1203   @let\=@doublebackslash}
1204}
1205
1206% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
1207% not active characters.  hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
1208% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens.  I've
1209% tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
1210%
1211% #1 is the tokens to replace.
1212% #2 is the replacement.
1213% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
1214%
1215\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
1216  \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
1217    ##1%
1218    \ifx\\##2\\%
1219    \else
1220      #2%
1221      \HyReturnAfterFi{%
1222        \HyPsdReplace##2\END
1223      }%
1224    \fi
1225  }%
1226  \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
1227}
1228\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
1229
1230% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
1231\def\backslashparens#1{%
1232  \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
1233             % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
1234  \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
1235  \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
1236}
1237
1238\ifpdf
1239  \input pdfcolor
1240  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
1241  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1242    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
1243    \def\imageheight{#3}%
1244    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1245    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1246    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1247      \immediate\pdfimage
1248    \else
1249      \immediate\pdfximage
1250    \fi
1251      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
1252      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
1253      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1254         #1.pdf%
1255       \else
1256         {#1.pdf}%
1257       \fi
1258    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1259      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1260    \fi}
1261  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1262    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
1263    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
1264    \atdummies
1265    \activebackslashdouble
1266    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
1267    \backslashparens\pdfdestname
1268    \pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
1269  }}%
1270  %
1271  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
1272  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
1273  %
1274  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
1275  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
1276  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1277  % come from Petr Olsak
1278  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1279    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1280  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1281    \advance\tempnum by 1
1282    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1283  %
1284  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
1285  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1286  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
1287  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
1288  % #4 is the page number
1289  %
1290  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1291    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1292    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
1293    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1294    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
1295    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1296    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
1297      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
1298    \else
1299      % Doubled backslashes in the name.
1300      {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1301       \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
1302    \fi
1303    %
1304    % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
1305    {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
1306     \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
1307    %
1308    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
1309  }
1310  %
1311  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1312    \begingroup
1313      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1314      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
1315      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
1316      %
1317      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1318      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1319	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
1320	\def\thissecnum{0}%
1321	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1322      }%
1323      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1324	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1325	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
1326	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1327      }%
1328      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1329	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1330	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1331      }%
1332      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1333	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1334      }%
1335      \def\thischapnum{0}%
1336      \def\thissecnum{0}%
1337      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1338      %
1339      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1340      % al. a second time, below.
1341      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1342      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1343      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1344      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1345      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1346      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1347      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1348      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1349      \readdatafile{toc}%
1350      %
1351      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1352      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1353      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1354      %
1355      % We use the node names as the destinations.
1356      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1357        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1358      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1359        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1360      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1361        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1362      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1363        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1364      %
1365      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1366      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1367      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
1368      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
1369      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1370      %
1371      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1372      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
1373      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
1374      \indexnofonts
1375      \setupdatafile
1376      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
1377      \input \jobname.toc
1378    \endgroup
1379  }
1380  %
1381  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1382    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1383    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1384      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1385        \advance\filenamelength by 1
1386      \fi
1387    \fi
1388    \nextsp}
1389  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1390  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1391    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1392  \else
1393    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1394  \fi
1395  % make a live url in pdf output.
1396  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1397    \begingroup
1398      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
1399      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
1400      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
1401      % people have actually reported a problem with.
1402      %
1403      \normalturnoffactive
1404      \def\@{@}%
1405      \let\/=\empty
1406      \makevalueexpandable
1407      \leavevmode\Red
1408      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1409        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1410    \endgroup}
1411  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1412  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1413  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1414  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1415  \def\maketoks{%
1416    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1417    \ifx\first0\adn0
1418    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1419    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1420    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1421    \else
1422      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1423      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1424        \let\next=\maketoks
1425        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1426        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1427      \fi
1428    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1429    \next}
1430  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1431    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1432  \def\pdflink#1{%
1433    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1434    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1435  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1436\else
1437  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1438  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1439  \let\endlink = \relax
1440  \let\linkcolor = \relax
1441  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1442\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
1443
1444
1445\message{fonts,}
1446
1447% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1448% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1449% italics, not bold italics.
1450%
1451\def\setfontstyle#1{%
1452  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1453  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
1454}
1455
1456% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1457%
1458\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1459
1460\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1461\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1462\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1463\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1464\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1465
1466% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1467% So we set up a \sf.
1468\newfam\sffam
1469\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1470\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1471
1472% We don't need math for this font style.
1473\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1474
1475% Default leading.
1476\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
1477
1478% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1479% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1480% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1481%
1482\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1483\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1484\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1485%
1486\def\setleading#1{%
1487  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
1488  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1489  \normalbaselines
1490  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1491    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1492                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1493  }%
1494}
1495
1496% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1497% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1498% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1499\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1500
1501% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1502% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1503% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1504\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1505\def\fontprefix{cm}
1506\fi
1507% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1508\def\rmshape{r}
1509\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
1510\def\bfshape{b}
1511\def\bxshape{bx}
1512\def\ttshape{tt}
1513\def\ttbshape{tt}
1514\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1515\def\itshape{ti}
1516\def\itbshape{bxti}
1517\def\slshape{sl}
1518\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1519\def\sfshape{ss}
1520\def\sfbshape{ss}
1521\def\scshape{csc}
1522\def\scbshape{csc}
1523
1524% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1525\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1526\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1527\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1528\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1529\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1530\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1531\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1532\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1533\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1534\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1535\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1536\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1537
1538% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1539\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
1540\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1541\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
1542\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1543
1544% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1545\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1546\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1547\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1548\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1549\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1550\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1551\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1552\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1553\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1554\font\smalli=cmmi9
1555\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1556
1557% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1558\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1559\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1560\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1561\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1562\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1563\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1564\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1565\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1566\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1567\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1568\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1569
1570% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1571\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1572\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1573\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1574\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1575\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1576\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1577\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1578\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1579\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1580\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1581\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1582\def\authorrm{\secrm}
1583\def\authortt{\sectt}
1584
1585% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1586\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1587\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1588\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1589\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1590\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1591\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1592\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1593\let\chapbf=\chaprm
1594\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1595\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1596\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1597
1598% Section fonts (14.4pt).
1599\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1600\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1601\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1602\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1603\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1604\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1605\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1606\let\secbf\secrm
1607\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1608\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1609\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1610
1611% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1612\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1613\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1614\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1615\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1616\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1617\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1618\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1619\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1620\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
1621\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1622\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1623
1624% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1625\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1626\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
1627\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
1628\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
1629\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
1630\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
1631\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
1632\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
1633\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
1634\font\reducedi=cmmi10
1635\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1636
1637% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1638% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
1639% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
1640% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
1641% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1642%
1643\def\resetmathfonts{%
1644  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
1645  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
1646  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1647}
1648
1649% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1650% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
1651% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
1652% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
1653%
1654% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
1655% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
1656% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
1657%
1658% This all needs generalizing, badly.
1659%
1660\def\textfonts{%
1661  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1662  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1663  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
1664  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1665  \def\curfontsize{text}%
1666  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1667  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1668\def\titlefonts{%
1669  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1670  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1671  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1672  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1673  \def\curfontsize{title}%
1674  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
1675  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1676\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1677\def\chapfonts{%
1678  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1679  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1680  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
1681  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1682  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
1683  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
1684  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1685\def\secfonts{%
1686  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1687  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1688  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
1689  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1690  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
1691  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
1692  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1693\def\subsecfonts{%
1694  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1695  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1696  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
1697  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1698  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
1699  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
1700  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1701\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
1702\def\reducedfonts{%
1703  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
1704  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
1705  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
1706  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
1707  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
1708  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1709  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1710\def\smallfonts{%
1711  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1712  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1713  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1714  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1715  \def\curfontsize{small}%
1716  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1717  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1718\def\smallerfonts{%
1719  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
1720  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
1721  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
1722  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
1723  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
1724  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1725  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
1726
1727% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
1728\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
1729
1730% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
1731% can fit this many characters:
1732%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
1733% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
1734%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
1735% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
1736% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
1737%
1738% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
1739%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
1740%
1741% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
1742% --karl, 24jan03.
1743
1744
1745% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1746%
1747\textfonts \rm
1748
1749% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1750\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1751\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1752
1753% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1754\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1755
1756% Fonts for short table of contents.
1757\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1758\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
1759\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1760\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1761
1762%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1763%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1764
1765% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1766% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1767\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
1768                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
1769\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1770\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1771
1772% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
1773% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
1774\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1775
1776% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
1777% ttsl for book titles, do we?
1778\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1779
1780\let\i=\smartitalic
1781\let\slanted=\smartslanted
1782\let\var=\smartslanted
1783\let\dfn=\smartslanted
1784\let\emph=\smartitalic
1785
1786% @b, explicit bold.
1787\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
1788\let\strong=\b
1789
1790% @sansserif, explicit sans.
1791\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
1792
1793% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
1794% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
1795% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
1796%
1797\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
1798\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
1799
1800% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
1801% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
1802% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
1803%
1804\chardef\colonChar = `\:
1805\chardef\commaChar = `\,
1806\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
1807\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
1808\chardef\questChar = `\?
1809\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
1810%
1811\catcode`@=11
1812  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
1813    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
1814    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
1815    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
1816  }
1817  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
1818    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
1819    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
1820    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
1821  }
1822\catcode`@=\other
1823\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
1824
1825\def\t#1{%
1826  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
1827  \null
1828}
1829\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
1830\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1831\font\keysy=cmsy9
1832\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
1833  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
1834    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
1835     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
1836    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
1837  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
1838% The old definition, with no lozenge:
1839%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
1840\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
1841
1842% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
1843\let\file=\samp
1844\let\option=\samp
1845
1846% @code is a modification of @t,
1847% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
1848\def\tclose#1{%
1849  {%
1850    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
1851    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
1852    %
1853    % Switch to typewriter.
1854    \tt
1855    %
1856    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
1857    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
1858    %
1859    % Turn off hyphenation.
1860    \nohyphenation
1861    %
1862    \rawbackslash
1863    \plainfrenchspacing
1864    #1%
1865  }%
1866  \null
1867}
1868
1869% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
1870% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
1871% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
1872
1873% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
1874% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
1875% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
1876% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
1877%  -- rms.
1878{
1879  \catcode`\-=\active
1880  \catcode`\_=\active
1881  %
1882  \global\def\code{\begingroup
1883    \catcode`\-=\active  \catcode`\_=\active
1884    \ifallowcodebreaks
1885     \let-\codedash
1886     \let_\codeunder
1887    \else
1888     \let-\realdash
1889     \let_\realunder
1890    \fi
1891    \codex
1892  }
1893}
1894
1895\def\realdash{-}
1896\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
1897\def\codeunder{%
1898  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
1899  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
1900  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
1901  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
1902  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
1903               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
1904             \else\normalunderscore \fi
1905             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
1906            {\_}%
1907}
1908\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
1909
1910% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
1911% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is undesirable in
1912% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
1913% general.  @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
1914%
1915\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
1916
1917\def\keywordtrue{true}
1918\def\keywordfalse{false}
1919
1920\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
1921  \def\txiarg{#1}%
1922  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
1923    \allowcodebreakstrue
1924  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
1925    \allowcodebreaksfalse
1926  \else
1927    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1928    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
1929  \fi\fi
1930}
1931
1932% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
1933% then @kbd has no effect.
1934
1935% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
1936%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
1937%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
1938\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
1939  \def\txiarg{#1}%
1940  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
1941    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
1942  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
1943    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1944  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
1945    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1946  \else
1947    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1948    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
1949  \fi\fi\fi
1950}
1951\def\worddistinct{distinct}
1952\def\wordexample{example}
1953\def\wordcode{code}
1954
1955% Default is `distinct.'
1956\kbdinputstyle distinct
1957
1958\def\xkey{\key}
1959\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
1960\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
1961\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
1962\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
1963
1964% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
1965\let\indicateurl=\code
1966\let\env=\code
1967\let\command=\code
1968
1969% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
1970% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
1971% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
1972% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
1973% a hypertex \special here.
1974%
1975\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
1976\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
1977  \unsepspaces
1978  \pdfurl{#1}%
1979  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1980  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1981    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
1982  \else
1983    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1984    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1985      \ifpdf
1986        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
1987      \else
1988        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
1989      \fi
1990    \else
1991      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
1992    \fi
1993  \fi
1994  \endlink
1995\endgroup}
1996
1997% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
1998%
1999\let\url=\uref
2000
2001% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
2002% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
2003%
2004%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
2005\ifpdf
2006  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
2007  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
2008    \unsepspaces
2009    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
2010    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
2011    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
2012    \endlink
2013  \endgroup}
2014\else
2015  \let\email=\uref
2016\fi
2017
2018% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
2019% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
2020% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
2021% this property, we can check that font parameter.
2022%
2023\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
2024
2025% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
2026% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
2027%
2028\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
2029
2030\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
2031
2032% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
2033% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
2034% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
2035%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
2036
2037% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
2038\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
2039\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
2040\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
2041
2042% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
2043% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
2044% all-uppercase.
2045%
2046\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
2047\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2048  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
2049  \def\temp{#2}%
2050  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2051    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2052  \fi
2053}
2054
2055% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
2056% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
2057%
2058\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
2059\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
2060  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
2061  \def\temp{#2}%
2062  \ifx\temp\empty \else
2063    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
2064  \fi
2065}
2066
2067% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
2068%
2069\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
2070
2071% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
2072% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
2073% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
2074% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
2075% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
2076%
2077% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
2078% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
2079% font height.
2080%
2081% feymr - regular
2082% feymo - slanted
2083% feybr - bold
2084% feybo - bold slanted
2085%
2086% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
2087% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
2088% Hmm.
2089%
2090% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
2091% Hope not.
2092%
2093%
2094\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
2095\def\eurofont{%
2096  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
2097  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
2098  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
2099  % font installed.
2100  %
2101  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
2102  % that to the current nominal size.
2103  %
2104  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
2105  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
2106  %
2107  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
2108  %
2109  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
2110    % bold:
2111    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
2112  \else
2113    % regular:
2114    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
2115  \fi
2116  \thiseurofont
2117}
2118
2119% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
2120% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
2121% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
2122%
2123\def\registeredsymbol{%
2124  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
2125               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
2126    }$%
2127}
2128
2129% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
2130%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
2131% so we'll define it if necessary.
2132%
2133\ifx\Orb\undefined
2134\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
2135\fi
2136
2137
2138\message{page headings,}
2139
2140\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
2141\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
2142
2143% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
2144\newif\ifseenauthor
2145\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
2146
2147% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
2148% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
2149%
2150\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2151 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2152\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2153 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2154
2155\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
2156        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
2157
2158\envdef\titlepage{%
2159  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
2160  \begingroup
2161    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
2162    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
2163    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
2164    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
2165    \finishedtitlepagetrue
2166    %
2167    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
2168    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
2169    \let\oldpage = \page
2170    \def\page{%
2171      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2172	 \finishtitlepage
2173      \fi
2174      \let\page = \oldpage
2175      \page
2176      \null
2177    }%
2178}
2179
2180\def\Etitlepage{%
2181    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2182	\finishtitlepage
2183    \fi
2184    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
2185    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
2186    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
2187    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
2188    \oldpage
2189  \endgroup
2190  %
2191  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
2192  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
2193  \HEADINGSon
2194  %
2195  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
2196  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2197    \shortcontents
2198    \contents
2199    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2200    \global\let\contents = \relax
2201  \fi
2202  %
2203  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2204    \contents
2205    \global\let\contents = \relax
2206    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2207  \fi
2208}
2209
2210\def\finishtitlepage{%
2211  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
2212  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
2213  \finishedtitlepagetrue
2214}
2215
2216%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
2217
2218\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
2219\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
2220
2221\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
2222		\let\tt=\authortt}
2223
2224\parseargdef\title{%
2225  \checkenv\titlepage
2226  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
2227  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
2228  \finishedtitlepagefalse
2229  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
2230}
2231
2232\parseargdef\subtitle{%
2233  \checkenv\titlepage
2234  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
2235}
2236
2237% @author should come last, but may come many times.
2238% It can also be used inside @quotation.
2239%
2240\parseargdef\author{%
2241  \def\temp{\quotation}%
2242  \ifx\thisenv\temp
2243    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
2244  \else
2245    \checkenv\titlepage
2246    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
2247    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
2248  \fi
2249}
2250
2251
2252%%% Set up page headings and footings.
2253
2254\let\thispage=\folio
2255
2256\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
2257\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
2258\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
2259\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
2260
2261% Now make TeX use those variables
2262\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
2263                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
2264\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
2265                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
2266\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
2267
2268% Commands to set those variables.
2269% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
2270% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
2271% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
2272% @evenfooting @thisfile||
2273% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
2274
2275
2276\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
2277\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2278\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2279\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2280
2281\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
2282\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2283\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2284\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2285
2286\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
2287
2288\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
2289\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2290\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2291\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2292
2293\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
2294\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2295\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2296  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
2297  %
2298  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
2299  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
2300  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
2301  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
2302}
2303
2304\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
2305
2306
2307% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
2308% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
2309% @headings off         turns them off.
2310% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
2311% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2312% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2313% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
2314% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
2315% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
2316
2317\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
2318
2319\def\HEADINGSoff{%
2320\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2321\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
2322\HEADINGSoff
2323% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
2324% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
2325% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
2326% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
2327% edge of all pages.
2328\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
2329\global\pageno=1
2330\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2331\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2332\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2333\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2334\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2335}
2336\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2337
2338% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
2339% page number on top right.
2340\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
2341\global\pageno=1
2342\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2343\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2344\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2345\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2346\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2347}
2348\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
2349
2350\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
2351\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
2352\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
2353\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2354\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2355\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2356\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2357\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2358}
2359
2360\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
2361\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
2362\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2363\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2364\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2365\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2366\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2367}
2368
2369% Subroutines used in generating headings
2370% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
2371% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
2372% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
2373\ifx\today\undefined
2374\def\today{%
2375  \number\day\space
2376  \ifcase\month
2377  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
2378  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
2379  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
2380  \fi
2381  \space\number\year}
2382\fi
2383
2384% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
2385% It generates no output of its own.
2386\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
2387\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
2388
2389
2390\message{tables,}
2391% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
2392
2393% default indentation of table text
2394\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
2395% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
2396\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
2397% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
2398\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
2399
2400% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
2401\newdimen\itemmax
2402
2403% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
2404% these defs.
2405% They also define \itemindex
2406% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
2407
2408\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
2409
2410\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
2411
2412\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
2413\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
2414
2415\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
2416  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
2417  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
2418  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
2419  \itemindex{#1}%
2420  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
2421  %
2422  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
2423  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
2424  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
2425  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
2426  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
2427  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
2428    %
2429    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
2430    % but leave it ragged-right.
2431    \begingroup
2432      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
2433      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
2434      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
2435      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
2436    \endgroup
2437    %
2438    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
2439    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
2440    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
2441    %
2442    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
2443    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
2444    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
2445    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
2446    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
2447    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
2448    %
2449    \penalty 10001
2450    \endgroup
2451    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
2452  \else
2453    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
2454    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
2455    \noindent
2456    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
2457    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
2458    % eventually be printed.
2459    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
2460    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
2461    \unhbox0
2462    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
2463    \endgroup
2464    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
2465  \fi
2466}
2467
2468\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
2469\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
2470
2471% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
2472\envdef\table{%
2473  \let\itemindex\gobble
2474  \tablecheck{table}%
2475}
2476\envdef\ftable{%
2477  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
2478  \tablecheck{ftable}%
2479}
2480\envdef\vtable{%
2481  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
2482  \tablecheck{vtable}%
2483}
2484\def\tablecheck#1{%
2485  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
2486    \endgroup
2487    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
2488      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
2489    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
2490  \else
2491    \let\next\tablex
2492  \fi
2493  \next
2494}
2495\def\tablex#1{%
2496  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
2497  \parsearg\tabley
2498}
2499\def\tabley#1{%
2500  {%
2501    \makevalueexpandable
2502    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
2503    \expandafter
2504  }\temp \endtablez
2505}
2506\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
2507  \aboveenvbreak
2508  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
2509  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
2510  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
2511  \itemmax=\tableindent
2512  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
2513  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
2514  \exdentamount=\tableindent
2515  \parindent = 0pt
2516  \parskip = \smallskipamount
2517  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2518  \let\item = \internalBitem
2519  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
2520}
2521\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
2522\let\Eftable\Etable
2523\let\Evtable\Etable
2524\let\Eitemize\Etable
2525\let\Eenumerate\Etable
2526
2527% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
2528
2529\newcount \itemno
2530
2531\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
2532
2533\def\doitemize#1{%
2534  \aboveenvbreak
2535  \itemmax=\itemindent
2536  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
2537  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
2538  \exdentamount=\itemindent
2539  \parindent=0pt
2540  \parskip=\smallskipamount
2541  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2542  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
2543  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
2544  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
2545  \let\item=\itemizeitem
2546}
2547
2548% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
2549%
2550\def\itemizeitem{%
2551  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
2552  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
2553  {%
2554   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
2555   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
2556   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
2557   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
2558   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
2559   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
2560   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
2561   % that's the theory.
2562   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
2563   \noindent
2564   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
2565   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
2566  \flushcr
2567}
2568
2569% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
2570% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
2571%
2572\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
2573
2574% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
2575% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
2576% argument is the same as `1'.
2577%
2578\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
2579\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2580  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2581  \def\thearg{#1}%
2582  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2583  %
2584  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
2585  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2586  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2587  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2588  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2589  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2590  \ifx\rest\empty
2591    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
2592    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2593    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2594    %   not equal to itself.
2595    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2596    %
2597    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2598    % continuing to look for a <number>.
2599    %
2600    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2601      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2602    \else
2603      % It's a letter.
2604      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2605        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2606      \else
2607        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2608      \fi
2609    \fi
2610  \else
2611    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
2612    \numericenumerate
2613  \fi
2614}
2615
2616% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
2617% given in \thearg.
2618%
2619\def\numericenumerate{%
2620  \itemno = \thearg
2621  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2622}
2623
2624% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2625\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2626  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2627  \startenumeration{%
2628    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2629    \ifnum\itemno=0
2630      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2631                  alphabet}%
2632    \fi
2633    \char\lccode\itemno
2634  }%
2635}
2636
2637% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2638\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2639  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2640  \startenumeration{%
2641    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2642    \ifnum\itemno=0
2643      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2644                  alphabet}
2645    \fi
2646    \char\uccode\itemno
2647  }%
2648}
2649
2650% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2651% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
2652% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2653%
2654\def\startenumeration#1{%
2655  \advance\itemno by -1
2656  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
2657}
2658
2659% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2660% to @enumerate.
2661%
2662\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2663\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2664\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2665\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2666
2667
2668% @multitable macros
2669% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2670%
2671% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2672% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
2673% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2674% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2675
2676% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2677
2678% To make preamble:
2679%
2680% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
2681%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2682%   @item ...
2683%
2684%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2685%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2686%   columns as desired.
2687
2688
2689% Or use a template:
2690%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2691%   @item ...
2692%   using the widest term desired in each column.
2693
2694% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
2695% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2696% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2697% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2698
2699% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
2700% if they are.
2701
2702% Sample multitable:
2703
2704%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2705%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
2706%   @item
2707%   first col stuff
2708%   @tab
2709%   second col stuff
2710%   @tab
2711%   third col
2712%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
2713%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
2714%
2715%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2716%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2717%   @end multitable
2718
2719% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2720% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2721% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2722% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2723% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2724%                                                            to baseline.
2725%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
2726%
2727\newskip\multitableparskip
2728\newskip\multitableparindent
2729\newdimen\multitablecolspace
2730\newskip\multitablelinespace
2731\multitableparskip=0pt
2732\multitableparindent=6pt
2733\multitablecolspace=12pt
2734\multitablelinespace=0pt
2735
2736% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2737%
2738\let\endsetuptable\relax
2739\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2740\let\columnfractions\relax
2741\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2742\newif\ifsetpercent
2743
2744% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
2745% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
2746%
2747\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
2748  \global\advance\colcount by 1
2749  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
2750  \setuptable
2751}
2752
2753\newcount\colcount
2754\def\setuptable#1{%
2755  \def\firstarg{#1}%
2756  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2757    \let\go = \relax
2758  \else
2759    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2760      \global\setpercenttrue
2761    \else
2762      \ifsetpercent
2763         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2764      \else
2765         \global\advance\colcount by 1
2766         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
2767                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2768         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2769      \fi
2770    \fi
2771    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2772      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2773      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2774      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
2775    \else
2776      \let\go = \setuptable
2777    \fi%
2778  \fi
2779  \go
2780}
2781
2782% multitable-only commands.
2783%
2784% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
2785% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
2786% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
2787\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
2788%
2789% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
2790% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
2791% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
2792%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
2793\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
2794
2795% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
2796%
2797\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
2798%
2799\envdef\multitable{%
2800  \vskip\parskip
2801  \startsavinginserts
2802  %
2803  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
2804  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
2805  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
2806  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
2807  \def\item{\crcr}%
2808  %
2809  \tolerance=9500
2810  \hbadness=9500
2811  \setmultitablespacing
2812  \parskip=\multitableparskip
2813  \parindent=\multitableparindent
2814  \overfullrule=0pt
2815  \global\colcount=0
2816  %
2817  \everycr = {%
2818    \noalign{%
2819      \global\everytab={}%
2820      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
2821      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
2822      \checkinserts
2823      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
2824      %\filbreak
2825	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
2826	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
2827	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
2828    }%
2829  }%
2830  %
2831  \parsearg\domultitable
2832}
2833\def\domultitable#1{%
2834  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
2835  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
2836  %
2837  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
2838  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
2839  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
2840  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2841  \halign\bgroup &%
2842    \global\advance\colcount by 1
2843    \multistrut
2844    \vtop{%
2845      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
2846      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
2847      %
2848      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
2849      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
2850      % the first one.
2851      %
2852      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
2853      % to the width of each template entry.
2854      %
2855      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
2856      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
2857      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
2858      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
2859      %
2860      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
2861      \rightskip=0pt
2862      \ifnum\colcount=1
2863	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
2864	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
2865      \else
2866	\ifsetpercent \else
2867	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
2868	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
2869	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
2870	\fi
2871       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
2872      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
2873      \fi
2874      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
2875      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
2876      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
2877      % For example:
2878      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
2879      % @item @code{#}
2880      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
2881      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
2882      % marking characters.
2883      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
2884    }\cr
2885}
2886\def\Emultitable{%
2887  \crcr
2888  \egroup % end the \halign
2889  \global\setpercentfalse
2890}
2891
2892\def\setmultitablespacing{%
2893  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
2894  %
2895  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
2896  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
2897  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
2898  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
2899\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
2900\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
2901\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
2902\fi
2903%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
2904%% table. If not, do nothing.
2905%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2906\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
2907\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2908\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2909                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2910\fi%
2911\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
2912\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2913\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2914                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2915\fi}
2916
2917
2918\message{conditionals,}
2919
2920% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
2921% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
2922% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
2923% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
2924% attempt to close an environment group.
2925%
2926\def\makecond#1{%
2927  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
2928  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
2929}
2930\makecond{iftex}
2931\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
2932\makecond{ifnothtml}
2933\makecond{ifnotinfo}
2934\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
2935\makecond{ifnotxml}
2936
2937% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
2938%
2939\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
2940\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
2941\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
2942\def\html{\doignore{html}}
2943\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
2944\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
2945\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
2946\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
2947\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
2948\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
2949\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
2950\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
2951\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
2952
2953% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
2954%
2955% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
2956\newcount\doignorecount
2957
2958\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
2959  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
2960  \obeylines
2961  \catcode`\@ = \other
2962  \catcode`\{ = \other
2963  \catcode`\} = \other
2964  %
2965  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
2966  \spaceisspace
2967  %
2968  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
2969  \doignorecount = 0
2970  %
2971  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
2972  \dodoignore{#1}%
2973}
2974
2975{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
2976  \obeylines %
2977  %
2978  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
2979    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
2980    %
2981    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
2982    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
2983      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
2984    %
2985    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
2986    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
2987    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
2988    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
2989    %
2990    % And now expand that command.
2991    \doignoretext ^^M%
2992  }%
2993}
2994
2995\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
2996  \def\temp{#1}%
2997  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
2998    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
2999  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
3000    \advance\doignorecount by 1
3001    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
3002    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
3003  \fi
3004  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
3005}
3006
3007% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
3008%
3009\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
3010  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
3011    \let\next\enddoignore
3012  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
3013    \advance\doignorecount by -1
3014    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
3015  \fi
3016  \next
3017}
3018
3019% Finish off ignored text.
3020{ \obeylines%
3021  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
3022  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
3023  % would result in a blank line in the output.
3024  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
3025}
3026
3027
3028% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
3029% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
3030%
3031% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
3032% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
3033% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
3034% didn't need it.
3035% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
3036%
3037\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
3038\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
3039  {%
3040    \makevalueexpandable
3041    \def\temp{#2}%
3042    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
3043    \ifx\temp\empty
3044      \next{}%
3045    \else
3046      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
3047    \fi
3048  }%
3049}
3050% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
3051\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
3052
3053% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
3054%
3055\parseargdef\clear{%
3056  {%
3057    \makevalueexpandable
3058    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
3059  }%
3060}
3061
3062% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
3063\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
3064\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
3065{
3066  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
3067  %
3068  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
3069    \let\value = \expandablevalue
3070    % We don't want these characters active, ...
3071    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
3072    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
3073    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
3074    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
3075    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
3076  }
3077}
3078
3079% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
3080% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
3081% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
3082% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
3083% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
3084% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
3085% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
3086%
3087\def\expandablevalue#1{%
3088  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
3089    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
3090    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
3091  \else
3092    \csname SET#1\endcsname
3093  \fi
3094}
3095
3096% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
3097% with @set.
3098%
3099% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
3100%
3101\makecond{ifset}
3102\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
3103\def\doifset#1#2{%
3104  {%
3105    \makevalueexpandable
3106    \let\next=\empty
3107    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
3108      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
3109    \fi
3110    \expandafter
3111  }\next
3112}
3113\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
3114
3115% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
3116% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
3117%
3118% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
3119% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
3120% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
3121%
3122\makecond{ifclear}
3123\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
3124\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
3125
3126% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
3127% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
3128\let\dircategory=\comment
3129
3130% @defininfoenclose.
3131\let\definfoenclose=\comment
3132
3133
3134\message{indexing,}
3135% Index generation facilities
3136
3137% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
3138% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
3139\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
3140
3141% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
3142% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
3143% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
3144% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
3145% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
3146% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
3147% for the sake of vms.
3148%
3149\def\newindex#1{%
3150  \iflinks
3151    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3152    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
3153  \fi
3154  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
3155    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
3156}
3157
3158% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
3159%
3160\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
3161
3162% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
3163%
3164\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
3165%
3166\def\newcodeindex#1{%
3167  \iflinks
3168    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3169    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
3170  \fi
3171  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
3172    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
3173}
3174
3175
3176% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
3177% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
3178%
3179% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
3180% inside @code.
3181%
3182\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
3183\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
3184
3185% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
3186% #3 the target index (bar).
3187\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
3188  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
3189  % closing the target index.
3190  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
3191    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
3192    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
3193    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
3194    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
3195  \fi
3196  % redefine \fooindfile:
3197  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
3198  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
3199  % redefine \fooindex:
3200  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
3201}
3202
3203% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
3204% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
3205%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
3206
3207% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
3208% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
3209
3210% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
3211% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
3212
3213\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
3214\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
3215
3216% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
3217\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
3218\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
3219
3220% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
3221% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
3222% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
3223%
3224\def\indexdummies{%
3225  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
3226  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
3227  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
3228  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
3229  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
3230  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
3231  \let\{ = \mylbrace
3232  \let\} = \myrbrace
3233  %
3234  % Do the redefinitions.
3235  \commondummies
3236}
3237
3238% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
3239% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
3240% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
3241% this will be simpler.
3242%
3243\def\atdummies{%
3244  \def\@{@@}%
3245  \def\ {@ }%
3246  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
3247  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
3248  %
3249  % Do the redefinitions.
3250  \commondummies
3251  \otherbackslash
3252}
3253
3254% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
3255%
3256\def\commondummies{%
3257  %
3258  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
3259  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control% words,
3260  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
3261  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
3262  % from whatever follows.
3263  %
3264  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
3265  % space.
3266  %
3267  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
3268  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
3269  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
3270  %
3271  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
3272  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
3273  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
3274  %
3275  \commondummiesnofonts
3276  %
3277  \definedummyletter\_%
3278  %
3279  % Non-English letters.
3280  \definedummyword\AA
3281  \definedummyword\AE
3282  \definedummyword\L
3283  \definedummyword\OE
3284  \definedummyword\O
3285  \definedummyword\aa
3286  \definedummyword\ae
3287  \definedummyword\l
3288  \definedummyword\oe
3289  \definedummyword\o
3290  \definedummyword\ss
3291  \definedummyword\exclamdown
3292  \definedummyword\questiondown
3293  \definedummyword\ordf
3294  \definedummyword\ordm
3295  %
3296  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
3297  \definedummyword\bf
3298  \definedummyword\gtr
3299  \definedummyword\hat
3300  \definedummyword\less
3301  \definedummyword\sf
3302  \definedummyword\sl
3303  \definedummyword\tclose
3304  \definedummyword\tt
3305  %
3306  \definedummyword\LaTeX
3307  \definedummyword\TeX
3308  %
3309  % Assorted special characters.
3310  \definedummyword\bullet
3311  \definedummyword\comma
3312  \definedummyword\copyright
3313  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
3314  \definedummyword\dots
3315  \definedummyword\enddots
3316  \definedummyword\equiv
3317  \definedummyword\error
3318  \definedummyword\euro
3319  \definedummyword\expansion
3320  \definedummyword\minus
3321  \definedummyword\pounds
3322  \definedummyword\point
3323  \definedummyword\print
3324  \definedummyword\result
3325  %
3326  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
3327  \macrolist
3328  %
3329  \normalturnoffactive
3330  %
3331  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
3332  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
3333  \makevalueexpandable
3334}
3335
3336% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
3337%
3338\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
3339  % Control letters and accents.
3340  \definedummyletter\!%
3341  \definedummyaccent\"%
3342  \definedummyaccent\'%
3343  \definedummyletter\*%
3344  \definedummyaccent\,%
3345  \definedummyletter\.%
3346  \definedummyletter\/%
3347  \definedummyletter\:%
3348  \definedummyaccent\=%
3349  \definedummyletter\?%
3350  \definedummyaccent\^%
3351  \definedummyaccent\`%
3352  \definedummyaccent\~%
3353  \definedummyword\u
3354  \definedummyword\v
3355  \definedummyword\H
3356  \definedummyword\dotaccent
3357  \definedummyword\ringaccent
3358  \definedummyword\tieaccent
3359  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
3360  \definedummyword\udotaccent
3361  \definedummyword\dotless
3362  %
3363  % Texinfo font commands.
3364  \definedummyword\b
3365  \definedummyword\i
3366  \definedummyword\r
3367  \definedummyword\sc
3368  \definedummyword\t
3369  %
3370  % Commands that take arguments.
3371  \definedummyword\acronym
3372  \definedummyword\cite
3373  \definedummyword\code
3374  \definedummyword\command
3375  \definedummyword\dfn
3376  \definedummyword\emph
3377  \definedummyword\env
3378  \definedummyword\file
3379  \definedummyword\kbd
3380  \definedummyword\key
3381  \definedummyword\math
3382  \definedummyword\option
3383  \definedummyword\pxref
3384  \definedummyword\ref
3385  \definedummyword\samp
3386  \definedummyword\strong
3387  \definedummyword\tie
3388  \definedummyword\uref
3389  \definedummyword\url
3390  \definedummyword\var
3391  \definedummyword\verb
3392  \definedummyword\w
3393  \definedummyword\xref
3394}
3395
3396% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
3397% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
3398% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
3399% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
3400%
3401\def\indexnofonts{%
3402  % Accent commands should become @asis.
3403  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
3404  % We can just ignore other control letters.
3405  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
3406  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
3407  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
3408  %
3409  \commondummiesnofonts
3410  %
3411  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
3412  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
3413  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
3414  %\let\tt=\asis
3415  %
3416  \def\ { }%
3417  \def\@{@}%
3418  % how to handle braces?
3419  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
3420  %
3421  % Non-English letters.
3422  \def\AA{AA}%
3423  \def\AE{AE}%
3424  \def\L{L}%
3425  \def\OE{OE}%
3426  \def\O{O}%
3427  \def\aa{aa}%
3428  \def\ae{ae}%
3429  \def\l{l}%
3430  \def\oe{oe}%
3431  \def\o{o}%
3432  \def\ss{ss}%
3433  \def\exclamdown{!}%
3434  \def\questiondown{?}%
3435  \def\ordf{a}%
3436  \def\ordm{o}%
3437  %
3438  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
3439  \def\TeX{TeX}%
3440  %
3441  % Assorted special characters.
3442  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
3443  \def\bullet{bullet}%
3444  \def\comma{,}%
3445  \def\copyright{copyright}%
3446  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
3447  \def\dots{...}%
3448  \def\enddots{...}%
3449  \def\equiv{==}%
3450  \def\error{error}%
3451  \def\euro{euro}%
3452  \def\expansion{==>}%
3453  \def\minus{-}%
3454  \def\pounds{pounds}%
3455  \def\point{.}%
3456  \def\print{-|}%
3457  \def\result{=>}%
3458  %
3459  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
3460  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
3461  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
3462  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
3463  % that starts with \.
3464  %
3465  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
3466  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
3467  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
3468  %
3469  \macrolist
3470}
3471
3472\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
3473\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
3474
3475% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
3476% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
3477\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
3478
3479% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
3480% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
3481% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
3482% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
3483%
3484\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
3485  \iflinks
3486  {%
3487    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
3488    \toks0 = {#2}%
3489    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
3490    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3491    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
3492      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
3493    \fi
3494    %
3495    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
3496    %
3497    \ifvmode
3498      \dosubindsanitize
3499    \else
3500      \dosubindwrite
3501    \fi
3502  }%
3503  \fi
3504}
3505
3506% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
3507%
3508\def\dosubindwrite{%
3509  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
3510  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
3511    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
3512  \fi
3513  %
3514  % Remember, we are within a group.
3515  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
3516  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
3517      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3518  %
3519  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
3520  % get the string to sort by.
3521  {\indexnofonts
3522   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
3523   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
3524  }%
3525  %
3526  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
3527  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
3528  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
3529  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
3530  % sorted result.
3531  \edef\temp{%
3532    \write\writeto{%
3533      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3534  }%
3535  \temp
3536}
3537
3538% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
3539%
3540% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3541% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3542% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3543% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
3544% like this:
3545% @end defun
3546% @tindex whatever
3547% @defun ...
3548% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3549% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3550% the previous defun.
3551%
3552% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
3553% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3554%
3555% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3556%
3557% But wait, there is a catch there:
3558% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
3559% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
3560% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
3561% representation of the skip.
3562%
3563% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
3564% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
3565%
3566\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
3567%
3568% ..., ready, GO:
3569%
3570\def\dosubindsanitize{%
3571  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
3572  \skip0 = \lastskip
3573  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
3574  \count255 = \lastpenalty
3575  %
3576  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
3577  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
3578  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
3579  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
3580  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
3581  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3582  \else
3583    \vskip-\skip0
3584  \fi
3585  %
3586  \dosubindwrite
3587  %
3588  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3589    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
3590    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
3591    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
3592    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
3593    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
3594    %
3595    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
3596    %   @vindex index-whatever
3597    %   Description.
3598    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
3599    % and the "Description." paragraph.
3600    \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
3601  \else
3602    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
3603    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
3604    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
3605    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
3606  \fi
3607}
3608
3609% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3610%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3611% or
3612%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3613% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3614% containing these kinds of lines:
3615%  \initial {c}
3616%     before the first topic whose initial is c
3617%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3618%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
3619%  \primary {topic}
3620%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3621%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3622%     for each subtopic.
3623
3624% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3625% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3626
3627\def\findex {\fnindex}
3628\def\kindex {\kyindex}
3629\def\cindex {\cpindex}
3630\def\vindex {\vrindex}
3631\def\tindex {\tpindex}
3632\def\pindex {\pgindex}
3633
3634\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3635{\obeylines %
3636\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3637\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3638
3639% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3640
3641% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3642% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3643%
3644\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
3645  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3646  %
3647  \smallfonts \rm
3648  \tolerance = 9500
3649  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
3650  %
3651  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
3652  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3653  % \initial {@}
3654  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3655  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3656  \catcode`\@ = 11
3657  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3658  \ifeof 1
3659    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3660    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3661    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3662    % there is some text.
3663    \putwordIndexNonexistent
3664  \else
3665    %
3666    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3667    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3668    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3669    \read 1 to \temp
3670    \ifeof 1
3671      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
3672    \else
3673      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3674      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3675      % to make right now.
3676      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
3677      \catcode`\\ = 0
3678      \escapechar = `\\
3679      \begindoublecolumns
3680      \input \jobname.#1s
3681      \enddoublecolumns
3682    \fi
3683  \fi
3684  \closein 1
3685\endgroup}
3686
3687% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3688% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3689
3690\def\initial#1{{%
3691  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3692  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3693  %
3694  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3695  \removelastskip
3696  %
3697  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3698  \nobreak
3699  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
3700  \penalty 0
3701  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
3702  %
3703  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
3704  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3705  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3706  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3707  %
3708  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3709  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3710  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3711  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3712  \nobreak
3713  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3714}}
3715
3716% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
3717% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
3718% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3719%
3720% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
3721%	\def\entry#1#2{...
3722% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
3723% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
3724% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
3725%
3726% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
3727%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
3728\def\entry{%
3729  \begingroup
3730    %
3731    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3732    % affect previous text.
3733    \par
3734    %
3735    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3736    \parfillskip = 0in
3737    %
3738    % No extra space above this paragraph.
3739    \parskip = 0in
3740    %
3741    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3742    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3743    %
3744    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3745    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
3746    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
3747    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
3748    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
3749    %
3750    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
3751    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
3752    \hangindent = 2em
3753    %
3754    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
3755    % with blank space.
3756    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
3757    %
3758    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
3759    % columns.
3760    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
3761    %
3762    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
3763    \afterassignment\doentry
3764    \let\temp =
3765}
3766\def\doentry{%
3767    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
3768      \noindent
3769      \aftergroup\finishentry
3770      % And now comes the text of the entry.
3771}
3772\def\finishentry#1{%
3773    % #1 is the page number.
3774    %
3775    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
3776    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
3777    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
3778    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
3779    \def\tempb{#1}%
3780    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
3781    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
3782    \ifx\tempc\tempd
3783      \ %
3784    \else
3785      %
3786      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
3787      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
3788      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
3789      \hfil\penalty50
3790      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
3791      %
3792      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
3793      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
3794      % \hbox ensues.
3795      \ifpdf
3796	\pdfgettoks#1.%
3797	\ \the\toksA
3798      \else
3799	\ #1%
3800      \fi
3801    \fi
3802    \par
3803  \endgroup
3804}
3805
3806% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
3807\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
3808  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
3809
3810\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
3811
3812\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
3813\def\secondary#1#2{{%
3814  \parfillskip=0in
3815  \parskip=0in
3816  \hangindent=1in
3817  \hangafter=1
3818  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
3819  \ifpdf
3820    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3821  \else
3822    #2
3823  \fi
3824  \par
3825}}
3826
3827% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
3828% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
3829% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
3830\catcode`\@=11
3831
3832\newbox\partialpage
3833\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
3834
3835\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
3836  % Grab any single-column material above us.
3837  \output = {%
3838    %
3839    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
3840    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
3841    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
3842    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
3843    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
3844    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
3845    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
3846    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
3847      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
3848    \fi
3849    %
3850    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
3851      % Unvbox the main output page.
3852      \unvbox\PAGE
3853      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
3854    }%
3855  }%
3856  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
3857  %
3858  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
3859  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
3860  %
3861  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
3862  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
3863  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
3864  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
3865  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
3866  %
3867  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
3868  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
3869  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
3870  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
3871  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
3872  %
3873  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
3874  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
3875  % been clobbered.
3876  %
3877  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
3878    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
3879    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
3880  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3881  %
3882  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
3883  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
3884  \vsize = 2\vsize
3885}
3886
3887% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
3888% the last.
3889%
3890\def\doublecolumnout{%
3891  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
3892  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
3893  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
3894  % previous page.
3895  \dimen@ = \vsize
3896  \divide\dimen@ by 2
3897  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
3898  %
3899  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
3900  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
3901  \onepageout\pagesofar
3902  \unvbox255
3903  \penalty\outputpenalty
3904}
3905%
3906% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
3907% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
3908\def\pagesofar{%
3909  \unvbox\partialpage
3910  %
3911  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3912  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
3913  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
3914}
3915%
3916% All done with double columns.
3917\def\enddoublecolumns{%
3918  \output = {%
3919    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
3920    % current page, no automatic page break.
3921    \balancecolumns
3922    %
3923    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
3924    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
3925    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
3926    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
3927    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
3928    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
3929    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
3930    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
3931  }%
3932  \eject
3933  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
3934  %
3935  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
3936  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
3937  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
3938  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
3939  \pagegoal = \vsize
3940}
3941%
3942% Called at the end of the double column material.
3943\def\balancecolumns{%
3944  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
3945  \dimen@ = \ht0
3946  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
3947  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
3948  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
3949  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
3950  \splittopskip = \topskip
3951  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
3952  {%
3953    \vbadness = 10000
3954    \loop
3955      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
3956      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
3957    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
3958      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
3959    \repeat
3960  }%
3961  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
3962  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
3963  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
3964  %
3965  \pagesofar
3966}
3967\catcode`\@ = \other
3968
3969
3970\message{sectioning,}
3971% Chapters, sections, etc.
3972
3973% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
3974% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
3975% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
3976% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
3977% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
3978\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
3979\newcount\chapno
3980\newcount\secno        \secno=0
3981\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
3982\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
3983
3984% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
3985\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
3986%
3987% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
3988% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
3989% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
3990% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
3991%
3992\def\appendixletter{%
3993  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
3994  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
3995  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
3996  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
3997  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
3998  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
3999  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
4000  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
4001  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
4002  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
4003  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
4004  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
4005  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
4006  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
4007  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
4008  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
4009  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
4010  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
4011  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
4012  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
4013  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
4014  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
4015  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
4016  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
4017  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
4018  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
4019  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
4020  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
4021  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
4022  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
4023  \else\char\the\appendixno
4024  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
4025  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
4026
4027% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
4028% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
4029% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
4030\def\thischapter{}
4031\def\thissection{}
4032
4033\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
4034\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
4035
4036% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
4037\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
4038\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
4039
4040% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
4041\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
4042\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
4043
4044% we only have subsub.
4045\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
4046%
4047% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
4048% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
4049\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
4050%
4051% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
4052% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
4053\def\chapheadtype{N}
4054
4055% Choose a heading macro
4056% #1 is heading type
4057% #2 is heading level
4058% #3 is text for heading
4059\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
4060  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
4061  \absseclevel=#2
4062  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
4063  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
4064  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
4065    \absseclevel = 0
4066  \else
4067    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
4068      \absseclevel = 3
4069    \fi
4070  \fi
4071  % The heading type:
4072  \def\headtype{#1}%
4073  \if \headtype U%
4074    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
4075      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
4076    \fi
4077  \else
4078    % Check for appendix sections:
4079    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
4080      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
4081    \else
4082      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
4083	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
4084      \fi\fi
4085    \fi
4086    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
4087    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
4088      \def\headtype{U}%
4089    \else
4090      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
4091    \fi
4092  \fi
4093  % Now print the heading:
4094  \if \headtype U%
4095    \ifcase\absseclevel
4096	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
4097    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
4098    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4099    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4100    \fi
4101  \else
4102    \if \headtype A%
4103      \ifcase\absseclevel
4104	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
4105      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
4106      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
4107      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4108      \fi
4109    \else
4110      \ifcase\absseclevel
4111	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
4112      \or \seczzz{#3}%
4113      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4114      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4115      \fi
4116    \fi
4117  \fi
4118  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4119}
4120
4121% an interface:
4122\def\numhead{\genhead N}
4123\def\apphead{\genhead A}
4124\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
4125
4126% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
4127% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
4128%
4129% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
4130% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
4131\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4132%
4133\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
4134\def\chapterzzz#1{%
4135  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
4136  % as an @include file.
4137  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4138    \global\advance\chapno by 1
4139  %
4140  % Used for \float.
4141  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
4142  \resetallfloatnos
4143  %
4144  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
4145  %
4146  % Write the actual heading.
4147  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
4148  %
4149  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
4150  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
4151  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4152  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4153}
4154
4155\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
4156\def\appendixzzz#1{%
4157  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4158    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
4159  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
4160  \resetallfloatnos
4161  %
4162  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
4163  \message{\appendixnum}%
4164  %
4165  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
4166  %
4167  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
4168  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
4169  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
4170}
4171
4172\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
4173\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
4174  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4175    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
4176  %
4177  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
4178  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4179  \resetallfloatnos
4180  %
4181  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
4182  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
4183  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
4184  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
4185  % to be executed, not expanded).
4186  %
4187  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
4188  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
4189  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
4190  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
4191  % the toc entries.)
4192  \toks0 = {#1}%
4193  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
4194  %
4195  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
4196  %
4197  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
4198  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
4199  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
4200}
4201
4202% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
4203\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
4204  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
4205  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
4206  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
4207  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
4208  \unnmhead0{#1}%
4209  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4210}
4211
4212% @top is like @unnumbered.
4213\let\top\unnumbered
4214
4215% Sections.
4216\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
4217\def\seczzz#1{%
4218  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4219  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
4220}
4221
4222\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
4223\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
4224  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4225  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
4226}
4227\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
4228
4229\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
4230\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
4231  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4232  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
4233}
4234
4235% Subsections.
4236\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
4237\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
4238  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4239  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4240}
4241
4242\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
4243\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
4244  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4245  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
4246                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4247}
4248
4249\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
4250\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
4251  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4252  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
4253                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4254}
4255
4256% Subsubsections.
4257\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
4258\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4259  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4260  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
4261                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4262}
4263
4264\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
4265\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
4266  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4267  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
4268                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4269}
4270
4271\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
4272\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4273  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4274  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
4275                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4276}
4277
4278% These macros control what the section commands do, according
4279% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
4280% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
4281\let\section = \numberedsec
4282\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4283\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4284
4285% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
4286
4287% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
4288%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
4289%          overlong headings to fold.
4290%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
4291%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
4292%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
4293%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
4294
4295
4296\def\majorheading{%
4297  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
4298  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
4299}
4300
4301\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
4302\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
4303  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4304                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4305                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
4306  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
4307  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4308}
4309
4310% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
4311\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4312  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4313\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4314  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4315\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4316  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4317
4318% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
4319% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
4320% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
4321
4322%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
4323\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
4324
4325%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
4326% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
4327
4328\newskip\chapheadingskip
4329
4330\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
4331\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
4332\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
4333
4334\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
4335
4336\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
4337\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4338\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
4339\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
4340
4341\def\CHAPPAGon{%
4342\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4343\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
4344\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
4345\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
4346
4347\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
4348\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
4349\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
4350\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
4351\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
4352
4353\CHAPPAGon
4354
4355% Chapter opening.
4356%
4357% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
4358% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
4359%
4360% To test against our argument.
4361\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
4362\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
4363\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
4364%
4365\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
4366  \pchapsepmacro
4367  {%
4368    \chapfonts \rm
4369    %
4370    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
4371    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
4372    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
4373    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4374    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
4375    %
4376    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
4377    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
4378    \def\temptype{#2}%
4379    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4380      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4381      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
4382      \gdef\thischapter{#1}%
4383    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4384      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
4385      \def\toctype{omit}%
4386      \gdef\thischapter{}%
4387    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4388      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
4389      \def\toctype{app}%
4390      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
4391      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
4392      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
4393      %
4394      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
4395                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4396    \else
4397      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
4398      \def\toctype{numchap}%
4399      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
4400                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4401    \fi\fi\fi
4402    %
4403    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
4404    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
4405    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
4406    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
4407    %
4408    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
4409    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
4410    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
4411    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
4412    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
4413    \donoderef{#2}%
4414    %
4415    % Typeset the actual heading.
4416    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4417          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
4418          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
4419  }%
4420  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
4421  \nobreak
4422}
4423
4424% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
4425\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4426\def\centerparameters{%
4427  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
4428  \leftskip = \rightskip
4429  \parfillskip = 0pt
4430}
4431
4432
4433% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
4434% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
4435%
4436\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
4437%
4438\def\unnchfopen #1{%
4439\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4440                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4441                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4442}
4443\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
4444\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
4445\par\penalty 5000 %
4446}
4447\def\centerchfopen #1{%
4448\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4449                       \parindent=0pt
4450                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4451}
4452\def\CHAPFopen{%
4453  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
4454  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
4455
4456
4457% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
4458% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
4459%
4460\newskip\secheadingskip
4461\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
4462
4463% Subsection titles.
4464\newskip\subsecheadingskip
4465\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
4466
4467% Subsubsection titles.
4468\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
4469\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
4470
4471
4472% Print any size, any type, section title.
4473%
4474% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
4475% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
4476% section number.
4477%
4478\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
4479  {%
4480    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
4481    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
4482    %
4483    % Insert space above the heading.
4484    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
4485    %
4486    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
4487    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
4488    \def\temptype{#3}%
4489    %
4490    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4491      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4492      \def\toctype{unn}%
4493      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4494    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4495      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
4496      % and don't redefine \thissection.
4497      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4498      \def\toctype{omit}%
4499      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
4500    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4501      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4502      \def\toctype{app}%
4503      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4504    \else
4505      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4506      \def\toctype{num}%
4507      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4508    \fi\fi\fi
4509    %
4510    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
4511    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
4512    %
4513    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
4514    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
4515    \donoderef{#3}%
4516    %
4517    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
4518    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
4519    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
4520    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
4521    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
4522    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
4523    \nobreak
4524    %
4525    % Output the actual section heading.
4526    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4527          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
4528          \unhbox0 #1}%
4529  }%
4530  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
4531  % Don't allow stretch, though.
4532  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
4533  %
4534  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
4535  % was followed by glue.
4536  \nobreak
4537  %
4538  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
4539  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
4540  % discardable item.)
4541  \vskip-\parskip
4542  %
4543  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
4544  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
4545  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
4546  %
4547  %   @section sec-whatever
4548  %   @deffn def-whatever
4549  \penalty 10001
4550}
4551
4552
4553\message{toc,}
4554% Table of contents.
4555\newwrite\tocfile
4556
4557% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
4558% Called from @chapter, etc.
4559%
4560% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
4561% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
4562% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
4563% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
4564% destination to jump to.
4565%
4566% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
4567% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
4568% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
4569% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
4570%
4571\newif\iftocfileopened
4572\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
4573%
4574\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
4575  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
4576  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
4577    \iftocfileopened\else
4578      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
4579      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
4580    \fi
4581    %
4582    \iflinks
4583      {\atdummies
4584       \edef\temp{%
4585         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
4586       \temp
4587      }%
4588    \fi
4589  \fi
4590  %
4591  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
4592  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
4593  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
4594  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
4595  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
4596  % `1', and two named `2'.
4597  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
4598}
4599
4600
4601% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
4602% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
4603% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
4604%
4605\def\activecatcodes{%
4606  \catcode`\"=\active
4607  \catcode`\$=\active
4608  \catcode`\<=\active
4609  \catcode`\>=\active
4610  \catcode`\\=\active
4611  \catcode`\^=\active
4612  \catcode`\_=\active
4613  \catcode`\|=\active
4614  \catcode`\~=\active
4615}
4616
4617
4618% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
4619\def\readtocfile{%
4620  \setupdatafile
4621  \activecatcodes
4622  \input \jobname.toc
4623}
4624
4625\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
4626\newcount\savepageno
4627\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
4628
4629% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
4630%
4631\def\startcontents#1{%
4632  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
4633  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
4634  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
4635  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
4636  \contentsalignmacro
4637  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
4638  %
4639  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
4640  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
4641  \def\thischapter{}%
4642  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
4643  %
4644  \savepageno = \pageno
4645  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
4646    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
4647    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
4648    %
4649    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
4650    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
4651}
4652
4653
4654% Normal (long) toc.
4655\def\contents{%
4656  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
4657    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4658    \ifeof 1 \else
4659      \readtocfile
4660    \fi
4661    \vfill \eject
4662    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4663    \ifeof 1 \else
4664      \pdfmakeoutlines
4665    \fi
4666    \closein 1
4667  \endgroup
4668  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4669  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4670}
4671
4672% And just the chapters.
4673\def\summarycontents{%
4674  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
4675    %
4676    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
4677    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
4678    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
4679    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4680    \secfonts
4681    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
4682    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
4683    \rm
4684    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4685    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4686    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
4687    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
4688    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
4689    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4690    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4691    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4692    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4693    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4694    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4695    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4696    \ifeof 1 \else
4697      \readtocfile
4698    \fi
4699    \closein 1
4700    \vfill \eject
4701    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4702  \endgroup
4703  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4704  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4705}
4706\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4707
4708% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
4709% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
4710%
4711\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
4712  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
4713  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
4714  % But use \hss just in case.
4715  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4716  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
4717  %
4718  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
4719  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
4720  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
4721  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
4722  % there are before deciding ...
4723  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
4724}
4725
4726% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4727% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4728% The last argument is the page number.
4729% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4730
4731% Chapters, in the main contents.
4732\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4733%
4734% Chapters, in the short toc.
4735% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
4736\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
4737  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
4738}
4739
4740% Appendices, in the main contents.
4741% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
4742%
4743\def\appendixbox#1{%
4744  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
4745  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
4746  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
4747%
4748\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4749
4750% Unnumbered chapters.
4751\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
4752\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
4753
4754% Sections.
4755\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4756\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
4757\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
4758
4759% Subsections.
4760\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4761\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
4762\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4763
4764% And subsubsections.
4765\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4766\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
4767\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4768
4769% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
4770% Same as \defaultparindent.
4771\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
4772
4773% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
4774% page number.
4775%
4776% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
4777% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
4778\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
4779   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
4780   \begingroup
4781     \chapentryfonts
4782     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4783   \endgroup
4784   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
4785}
4786
4787\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4788  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
4789  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4790\endgroup}
4791
4792\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4793  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
4794  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4795\endgroup}
4796
4797\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4798  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
4799  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4800\endgroup}
4801
4802% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
4803\let\tocentry = \entry
4804
4805% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
4806\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
4807
4808\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4809\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4810
4811\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
4812\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
4813\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4814\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4815
4816
4817\message{environments,}
4818% @foo ... @end foo.
4819
4820% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
4821%
4822% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
4823% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
4824%
4825\def\point{$\star$}
4826\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
4827\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
4828\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
4829\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
4830
4831% The @error{} command.
4832% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
4833%
4834\newbox\errorbox
4835%
4836{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
4837\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
4838% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
4839\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
4840%
4841\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
4842   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
4843   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
4844   \vbox{%
4845      \hrule height\dimen2
4846      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
4847         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
4848         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
4849      \hrule height\dimen2}
4850    \hfil}
4851%
4852\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
4853
4854% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
4855% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
4856% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
4857
4858\envdef\tex{%
4859  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
4860  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
4861  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
4862  \catcode `\%=14
4863  \catcode `\+=\other
4864  \catcode `\"=\other
4865  \catcode `\|=\other
4866  \catcode `\<=\other
4867  \catcode `\>=\other
4868  \escapechar=`\\
4869  %
4870  \let\b=\ptexb
4871  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
4872  \let\c=\ptexc
4873  \let\,=\ptexcomma
4874  \let\.=\ptexdot
4875  \let\dots=\ptexdots
4876  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
4877  \let\!=\ptexexclam
4878  \let\i=\ptexi
4879  \let\indent=\ptexindent
4880  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
4881  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
4882  \let\+=\tabalign
4883  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
4884  \let\/=\ptexslash
4885  \let\*=\ptexstar
4886  \let\t=\ptext
4887  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
4888  %
4889  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
4890  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
4891  \def\@{@}%
4892}
4893% There is no need to define \Etex.
4894
4895% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
4896% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
4897% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
4898
4899% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
4900\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
4901
4902% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
4903% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
4904% have any width.
4905\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
4906
4907% This space is always present above and below environments.
4908\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
4909
4910% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
4911% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
4912% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
4913% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
4914%
4915\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
4916  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
4917  % \sectionheading, q.v.
4918  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
4919    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
4920    \endgraf
4921    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
4922      \removelastskip
4923      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
4924      % or better ...
4925      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
4926      \vskip\envskipamount
4927    \fi
4928  \fi
4929}}
4930
4931\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
4932
4933% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
4934% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
4935\let\nonarrowing=\relax
4936
4937% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
4938% environment contents.
4939\font\circle=lcircle10
4940\newdimen\circthick
4941\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
4942\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
4943\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
4944%
4945\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
4946\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
4947\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
4948\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
4949\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4950        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
4951        \hskip\rskip}}
4952\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4953        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
4954        \hskip\rskip}}
4955%
4956\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
4957
4958\envdef\cartouche{%
4959  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
4960  \startsavinginserts
4961  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
4962  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
4963  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
4964  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
4965  \cartouter=\hsize
4966  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
4967				% side, and for 6pt waste from
4968				% each corner char, and rule thickness
4969  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
4970  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
4971  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4972  \vbox\bgroup
4973      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
4974      \carttop
4975      \hbox\bgroup
4976	  \hskip\lskip
4977	  \vrule\kern3pt
4978	  \vbox\bgroup
4979	      \kern3pt
4980	      \hsize=\cartinner
4981	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
4982	      \lineskip=\normlskip
4983	      \parskip=\normpskip
4984	      \vskip -\parskip
4985	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
4986}
4987\def\Ecartouche{%
4988              \ifhmode\par\fi
4989	      \kern3pt
4990	  \egroup
4991	  \kern3pt\vrule
4992	  \hskip\rskip
4993      \egroup
4994      \cartbot
4995  \egroup
4996  \checkinserts
4997}
4998
4999
5000% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
5001% inside a group.
5002\def\nonfillstart{%
5003  \aboveenvbreak
5004  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
5005  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
5006  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
5007  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
5008  \parskip = 0pt
5009  \parindent = 0pt
5010  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
5011  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
5012    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
5013    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
5014  \else
5015    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
5016  \fi
5017  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
5018}
5019
5020% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
5021% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
5022% This affects the following displayed environments:
5023%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
5024%
5025\def\smallword{small}
5026\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
5027\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
5028\def\setnormaldispenv{%
5029  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
5030    \smallexamplefonts \rm
5031  \fi
5032}
5033\def\setsmalldispenv{%
5034  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
5035  \else
5036    \smallexamplefonts \rm
5037  \fi
5038}
5039
5040% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
5041% Let's do it by one command:
5042\def\makedispenv #1#2{
5043  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
5044  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
5045  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
5046  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
5047}
5048
5049% Define two synonyms:
5050\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
5051  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
5052  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
5053}
5054
5055% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
5056%
5057% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
5058% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
5059%
5060\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
5061  \nonfillstart
5062  \tt
5063  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
5064  \gobble       % eat return
5065}
5066
5067% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
5068%
5069\makedispenv {display}{%
5070  \nonfillstart
5071  \gobble
5072}
5073
5074% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
5075%
5076\makedispenv{format}{%
5077  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5078  \nonfillstart
5079  \gobble
5080}
5081
5082% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
5083\envdef\flushleft{%
5084  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5085  \nonfillstart
5086  \gobble
5087}
5088\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
5089
5090% @flushright.
5091%
5092\envdef\flushright{%
5093  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5094  \nonfillstart
5095  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
5096  \gobble
5097}
5098\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
5099
5100
5101% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
5102% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
5103% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
5104% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
5105%
5106\envdef\quotation{%
5107  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
5108  \parindent=0pt
5109  %
5110  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
5111  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
5112    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
5113    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
5114    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
5115  \else
5116    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
5117  \fi
5118  \parsearg\quotationlabel
5119}
5120
5121% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
5122% doing normal filling.
5123%
5124\def\Equotation{%
5125  \par
5126  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
5127    % indent a bit.
5128    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
5129  \fi
5130  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
5131}
5132
5133% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
5134\def\quotationlabel#1{%
5135  \def\temp{#1}%
5136  \ifx\temp\empty \else
5137    {\bf #1: }%
5138  \fi
5139}
5140
5141
5142% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
5143% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
5144% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
5145% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
5146%
5147% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
5148%
5149% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
5150% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
5151% verbatim line.
5152\def\dospecials{%
5153  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
5154  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
5155  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
5156}
5157%
5158% [Knuth] p. 380
5159\def\uncatcodespecials{%
5160  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
5161%
5162% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
5163% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
5164\begingroup
5165  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
5166\endgroup
5167%
5168% Setup for the @verb command.
5169%
5170% Eight spaces for a tab
5171\begingroup
5172  \catcode`\^^I=\active
5173  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
5174\endgroup
5175%
5176\def\setupverb{%
5177  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5178  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
5179  \catcode`\`=\active
5180  \tabeightspaces
5181  % Respect line breaks,
5182  % print special symbols as themselves, and
5183  % make each space count
5184  % must do in this order:
5185  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5186}
5187
5188% Setup for the @verbatim environment
5189%
5190% Real tab expansion
5191\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
5192%
5193\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
5194\begingroup
5195  \catcode`\^^I=\active
5196  \gdef\tabexpand{%
5197    \catcode`\^^I=\active
5198    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
5199      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
5200      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
5201      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
5202      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
5203      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
5204    }%
5205  }
5206\endgroup
5207\def\setupverbatim{%
5208  \let\nonarrowing = t%
5209  \nonfillstart
5210  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5211  \tt
5212  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
5213  \catcode`\`=\active
5214  \tabexpand
5215  % Respect line breaks,
5216  % print special symbols as themselves, and
5217  % make each space count
5218  % must do in this order:
5219  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5220  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
5221}
5222
5223% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
5224% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
5225% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
5226%
5227%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
5228%
5229% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
5230\begingroup
5231  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
5232  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
5233\endgroup
5234%
5235\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
5236%
5237%
5238% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
5239% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
5240%
5241%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
5242%
5243% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
5244% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
5245% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
5246%
5247% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
5248%
5249\begingroup
5250  \catcode`\ =\active
5251  \obeylines %
5252  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
5253  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
5254  % line in the output.
5255  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
5256  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
5257  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
5258\endgroup
5259%
5260\envdef\verbatim{%
5261    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
5262}
5263\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
5264
5265
5266% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
5267%
5268\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
5269%
5270\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
5271  {%
5272    \makevalueexpandable
5273    \setupverbatim
5274    \input #1
5275    \afterenvbreak
5276  }%
5277}
5278
5279% @copying ... @end copying.
5280% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
5281%
5282% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
5283% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
5284% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
5285% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
5286% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
5287% possible is very desirable.
5288%
5289\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
5290\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
5291%
5292\def\insertcopying{%
5293  \begingroup
5294    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
5295    \scanexp\copyingtext
5296  \endgroup
5297}
5298
5299\message{defuns,}
5300% @defun etc.
5301
5302\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
5303\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
5304\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
5305
5306% Start the processing of @deffn:
5307\def\startdefun{%
5308  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
5309    \medbreak
5310  \else
5311    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
5312    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
5313    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
5314    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
5315    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
5316    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
5317    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
5318    %
5319    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
5320    %
5321    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
5322    % But do insert the glue.
5323    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
5324  \fi
5325  %
5326  \parindent=0in
5327  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
5328  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5329}
5330
5331\def\dodefunx#1{%
5332  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
5333  \checkenv#1%
5334  %
5335  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
5336  % It's not a great place, though.
5337  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
5338  %
5339  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
5340  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
5341}
5342\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
5343
5344% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
5345%
5346\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
5347  \begingroup
5348    % call \deffnheader:
5349    #1#2 \endheader
5350    % common ending:
5351    \interlinepenalty = 10000
5352    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
5353    \endgraf
5354    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
5355    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
5356    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
5357    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
5358    \checkparencounts
5359  \endgroup
5360}
5361
5362\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
5363
5364% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
5365% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
5366%
5367\def\makedefun#1{%
5368  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
5369  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
5370    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
5371  \temp
5372}
5373
5374% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
5375%
5376% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
5377% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
5378%
5379\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
5380  \envdef#1{%
5381    \startdefun
5382    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
5383  }%
5384  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
5385  \def#3%
5386}
5387
5388%%% Untyped functions:
5389
5390% @deffn category name args
5391\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
5392
5393% @deffn category class name args
5394\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5395
5396% \defopon {category on}class name args
5397\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5398
5399% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
5400%
5401\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
5402  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
5403  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
5404  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
5405}
5406
5407%%% Typed functions:
5408
5409% @deftypefn category type name args
5410\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
5411
5412% @deftypeop category class type name args
5413\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5414
5415% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
5416\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5417
5418% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
5419%
5420\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5421  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5422  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5423}
5424
5425%%% Typed variables:
5426
5427% @deftypevr category type var args
5428\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
5429
5430% @deftypecv category class type var args
5431\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5432
5433% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
5434\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5435
5436% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
5437%
5438\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5439  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5440  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5441}
5442
5443%%% Untyped variables:
5444
5445% @defvr category var args
5446\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
5447
5448% @defcv category class var args
5449\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5450
5451% \defcvof {category of}class var args
5452\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
5453
5454%%% Type:
5455% @deftp category name args
5456\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
5457  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
5458  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
5459}
5460
5461% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
5462\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5463\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
5464\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
5465\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5466\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5467\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
5468\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5469\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
5470\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
5471\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5472\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5473
5474% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
5475% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
5476% #2 is the return type, if any.
5477% #3 is the function name.
5478%
5479% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
5480%
5481\def\defname#1#2#3{%
5482  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
5483  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5484  %
5485  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
5486  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
5487  % just below it.
5488  \def\temp{#1}%
5489  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
5490  %
5491  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
5492  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
5493  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
5494  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
5495  % The continuations:
5496  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
5497  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
5498  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
5499  %
5500  % Put the type name to the right margin.
5501  \noindent
5502  \hbox to 0pt{%
5503    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
5504    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
5505    \kern\leftskip
5506    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
5507  }%
5508  %
5509  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
5510  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
5511  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5512  {%
5513    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
5514    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
5515    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
5516    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
5517    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
5518    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
5519    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
5520    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
5521    \df \tt
5522    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
5523    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
5524    #3% output function name
5525  }%
5526  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
5527  %
5528  \boldbrax
5529  % arguments will be output next, if any.
5530}
5531
5532% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
5533% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
5534% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
5535% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
5536%
5537\def\defunargs#1{%
5538  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
5539  % tt for the names.
5540  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
5541  %
5542  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
5543  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
5544  \let\var=\ttslanted
5545  #1%
5546  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
5547}
5548
5549% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
5550%
5551\def\activeparens{%
5552  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
5553  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
5554  \catcode`\&=\active
5555}
5556
5557% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
5558\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
5559
5560% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
5561% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
5562% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
5563{
5564  \activeparens
5565  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
5566  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
5567  \global\let& = \&
5568
5569  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
5570  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
5571}
5572
5573\newcount\parencount
5574
5575% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
5576\newif\ifampseen
5577\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
5578
5579\def\parenfont{%
5580  \ifampseen
5581    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
5582    % otherwise use the default font.
5583    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
5584  \else
5585    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
5586    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
5587    \sf
5588  \fi
5589}
5590\def\infirstlevel#1{%
5591  \ifampseen
5592    \ifnum\parencount=1
5593      #1%
5594    \fi
5595  \fi
5596}
5597\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
5598
5599\def\opnr{%
5600  \global\advance\parencount by 1
5601  {\parenfont(}%
5602  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
5603}
5604\def\clnr{%
5605  {\parenfont)}%
5606  \infirstlevel \sl
5607  \global\advance\parencount by -1
5608}
5609
5610\newcount\brackcount
5611\def\lbrb{%
5612  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
5613  {\bf[}%
5614}
5615\def\rbrb{%
5616  {\bf]}%
5617  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
5618}
5619
5620\def\checkparencounts{%
5621  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
5622  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
5623}
5624\def\badparencount{%
5625  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
5626  \global\parencount=0
5627}
5628\def\badbrackcount{%
5629  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
5630  \global\brackcount=0
5631}
5632
5633
5634\message{macros,}
5635% @macro.
5636
5637% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5638% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5639\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5640  \newwrite\macscribble
5641  \def\scantokens#1{%
5642    \toks0={#1}%
5643    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5644    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5645    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5646    \input \jobname.tmp
5647  }
5648\fi
5649
5650\def\scanmacro#1{%
5651  \begingroup
5652    \newlinechar`\^^M
5653    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5654    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5655    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
5656    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
5657    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
5658    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
5659    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
5660    % ... and \example
5661    \spaceisspace
5662    %
5663    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5664    %
5665    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
5666    %							--kasal, 29nov03
5667    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
5668  \endgroup
5669}
5670
5671\def\scanexp#1{%
5672  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
5673  \temp
5674}
5675
5676\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
5677\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
5678\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
5679
5680% List of all defined macros in the form
5681%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
5682% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
5683% if there is a need.
5684\def\macrolist{}
5685
5686% Add the macro to \macrolist
5687\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
5688\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
5689     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
5690     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
5691}
5692
5693% Utility routines.
5694% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
5695%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
5696% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
5697%
5698\def\cslet#1#2{%
5699  \expandafter\let
5700  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
5701  \csname#2\endcsname
5702}
5703
5704% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5705% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5706{\catcode`\@=11
5707\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
5708\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
5709\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
5710\def\unbrace#1{#1}
5711\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
5712}
5713
5714% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
5715{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
5716\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
5717\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
5718\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
5719}
5720
5721% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
5722% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
5723% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
5724
5725% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
5726% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
5727% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
5728
5729\def\scanctxt{%
5730  \catcode`\"=\other
5731  \catcode`\+=\other
5732  \catcode`\<=\other
5733  \catcode`\>=\other
5734  \catcode`\@=\other
5735  \catcode`\^=\other
5736  \catcode`\_=\other
5737  \catcode`\|=\other
5738  \catcode`\~=\other
5739}
5740
5741\def\scanargctxt{%
5742  \scanctxt
5743  \catcode`\\=\other
5744  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5745}
5746
5747\def\macrobodyctxt{%
5748  \scanctxt
5749  \catcode`\{=\other
5750  \catcode`\}=\other
5751  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5752  \usembodybackslash
5753}
5754
5755\def\macroargctxt{%
5756  \scanctxt
5757  \catcode`\\=\other
5758}
5759
5760% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
5761% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
5762% where N is the macro parameter number.
5763% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
5764% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
5765
5766{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
5767 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
5768 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
5769}
5770\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
5771
5772\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
5773\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
5774
5775\def\macroxxx#1{%
5776  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
5777  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
5778     \paramno=0%
5779  \else
5780     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
5781  \fi
5782  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
5783     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
5784  \else
5785     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
5786     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
5787     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
5788     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
5789     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
5790  \fi
5791  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
5792  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
5793  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
5794  \fi}
5795
5796\parseargdef\unmacro{%
5797  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
5798    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
5799    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
5800    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
5801    \begingroup
5802      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
5803      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
5804      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
5805    \endgroup
5806  \else
5807    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
5808  \fi
5809}
5810
5811% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
5812% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
5813%
5814\def\unmacrodo#1{%
5815  \ifx #1\relax
5816    % remove this
5817  \else
5818    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
5819  \fi
5820}
5821
5822% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
5823% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
5824% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
5825\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
5826\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
5827\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
5828\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
5829
5830% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
5831% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
5832% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
5833% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
5834
5835% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
5836% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
5837% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
5838% it to # just before using the token list produced.
5839%
5840% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
5841% the macro is used.
5842
5843\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
5844        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
5845\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
5846  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
5847  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
5848    \advance\paramno by 1%
5849    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
5850        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
5851    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
5852  \fi\next}
5853
5854% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
5855% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
5856
5857\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
5858{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5859\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
5860{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5861
5862% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
5863% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
5864% Much magic with \expandafter here.
5865% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
5866% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
5867\def\defmacro{%
5868  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
5869  \ifrecursive
5870    \ifcase\paramno
5871    % 0
5872      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5873        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5874    \or % 1
5875      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5876         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5877         \noexpand\braceorline
5878         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5879      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5880         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5881    \else % many
5882      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5883         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5884         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5885      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5886          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5887      \expandafter\expandafter
5888      \expandafter\xdef
5889      \expandafter\expandafter
5890        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5891          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5892    \fi
5893  \else
5894    \ifcase\paramno
5895    % 0
5896      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5897        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5898        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5899    \or % 1
5900      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5901         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5902         \noexpand\braceorline
5903         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5904      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5905        \egroup
5906        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5907        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5908    \else % many
5909      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5910         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5911         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5912      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5913          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5914      \expandafter\expandafter
5915      \expandafter\xdef
5916      \expandafter\expandafter
5917      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5918      \paramlist{%
5919          \egroup
5920          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5921          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5922    \fi
5923  \fi}
5924
5925\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
5926
5927% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
5928% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
5929% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
5930% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
5931\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
5932\def\braceorlinexxx{%
5933  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
5934    \expandafter\parsearg
5935  \fi \next}
5936
5937
5938% @alias.
5939% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
5940% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
5941\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
5942\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
5943\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
5944  {%
5945    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
5946    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
5947    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
5948  }%
5949  \next
5950}
5951
5952
5953\message{cross references,}
5954
5955\newwrite\auxfile
5956
5957\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
5958\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
5959
5960% @inforef is relatively simple.
5961\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
5962\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
5963  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
5964
5965% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
5966% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
5967% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
5968% @node foo , bar , ...
5969% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
5970%
5971\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
5972%
5973% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
5974% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
5975\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
5976\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
5977
5978\let\nwnode=\node
5979\let\lastnode=\empty
5980
5981% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
5982% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
5983%
5984\def\donoderef#1{%
5985  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
5986    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
5987    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
5988  \fi
5989}
5990
5991% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
5992%
5993\newcount\savesfregister
5994%
5995\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
5996\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
5997\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
5998
5999% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
6000% anchor), which consists of three parts:
6001% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
6002%                 or the anchor name.
6003% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
6004%                 empty for anchors.
6005% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
6006%
6007% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
6008% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
6009% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
6010%
6011\def\setref#1#2{%
6012  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
6013  \iflinks
6014    {%
6015      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
6016      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
6017	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
6018	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
6019      }%
6020      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
6021      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
6022      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
6023      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
6024    }%
6025  \fi
6026}
6027
6028% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
6029% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
6030% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
6031% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
6032%
6033\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6034\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6035\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
6036\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
6037  \unsepspaces
6038  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
6039  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
6040  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
6041  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
6042  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
6043    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
6044    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
6045      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
6046      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6047    \else
6048      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
6049      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
6050      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6051        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
6052        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6053      \else
6054        \ifhavexrefs
6055          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
6056          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
6057        \else
6058          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
6059          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
6060        \fi%
6061      \fi
6062    \fi
6063  \fi
6064  %
6065  % Make link in pdf output.
6066  \ifpdf
6067    \leavevmode
6068    \getfilename{#4}%
6069    {\turnoffactive
6070     % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
6071     {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
6072      \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
6073     %
6074     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
6075       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
6076         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
6077     \else
6078       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
6079         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
6080     \fi
6081    }%
6082    \linkcolor
6083  \fi
6084  %
6085  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
6086  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
6087  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
6088  {%
6089    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
6090    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
6091    \indexnofonts
6092    \turnoffactive
6093    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
6094      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
6095  }%
6096  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
6097    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
6098    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
6099    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
6100      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
6101    \else
6102      \printedrefname
6103    \fi
6104    %
6105    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
6106    % "in MANUALNAME".
6107    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6108      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6109    \fi
6110  \else
6111    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
6112    %
6113    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
6114    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
6115    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
6116    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
6117    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
6118    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
6119    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6120      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6121    \else
6122      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
6123      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
6124      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
6125      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
6126      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
6127      {\turnoffactive
6128       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
6129       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
6130       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
6131       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
6132      }%
6133      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
6134      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
6135      %
6136      % But we always want a comma and a space:
6137      ,\space
6138      %
6139      % output the `page 3'.
6140      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
6141    \fi
6142  \fi
6143  \endlink
6144\endgroup}
6145
6146% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
6147% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
6148% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
6149% one that Bob is working on :).
6150%
6151\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
6152
6153% Things referred to by \setref.
6154%
6155\def\Ynothing{}
6156\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
6157\def\Ynumbered{%
6158  \ifnum\secno=0
6159    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
6160  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6161    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
6162  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6163    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6164  \else
6165    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6166  \fi\fi\fi
6167}
6168\def\Yappendix{%
6169  \ifnum\secno=0
6170     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
6171  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6172     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
6173  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6174    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6175  \else
6176    \putwordSection@tie
6177      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6178  \fi\fi\fi
6179}
6180
6181% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
6182% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
6183%
6184\def\refx#1#2{%
6185  {%
6186    \indexnofonts
6187    \otherbackslash
6188    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
6189      \csname XR#1\endcsname
6190  }%
6191  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
6192    % If not defined, say something at least.
6193    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
6194    \iflinks
6195      \ifhavexrefs
6196        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
6197      \else
6198        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
6199          \global\warnedxrefstrue
6200          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
6201        \fi
6202      \fi
6203    \fi
6204  \else
6205    % It's defined, so just use it.
6206    \thisrefX
6207  \fi
6208  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
6209}
6210
6211% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
6212% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
6213% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
6214%
6215\def\xrdef#1#2{%
6216  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
6217  %
6218  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
6219  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
6220    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
6221    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
6222      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
6223    %
6224    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
6225    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
6226      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
6227    \else
6228      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
6229      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
6230    \fi
6231    %
6232    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
6233    % for later use in \listoffloats.
6234    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
6235  \fi
6236}
6237
6238% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
6239%
6240\def\tryauxfile{%
6241  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
6242  \ifeof 1 \else
6243    \readdatafile{aux}%
6244    \global\havexrefstrue
6245  \fi
6246  \closein 1
6247}
6248
6249\def\setupdatafile{%
6250  \catcode`\^^@=\other
6251  \catcode`\^^A=\other
6252  \catcode`\^^B=\other
6253  \catcode`\^^C=\other
6254  \catcode`\^^D=\other
6255  \catcode`\^^E=\other
6256  \catcode`\^^F=\other
6257  \catcode`\^^G=\other
6258  \catcode`\^^H=\other
6259  \catcode`\^^K=\other
6260  \catcode`\^^L=\other
6261  \catcode`\^^N=\other
6262  \catcode`\^^P=\other
6263  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
6264  \catcode`\^^R=\other
6265  \catcode`\^^S=\other
6266  \catcode`\^^T=\other
6267  \catcode`\^^U=\other
6268  \catcode`\^^V=\other
6269  \catcode`\^^W=\other
6270  \catcode`\^^X=\other
6271  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
6272  \catcode`\^^[=\other
6273  \catcode`\^^\=\other
6274  \catcode`\^^]=\other
6275  \catcode`\^^^=\other
6276  \catcode`\^^_=\other
6277  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
6278  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
6279  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
6280  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
6281  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
6282  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
6283  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
6284  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
6285  %
6286  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
6287  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
6288  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
6289  %
6290  \catcode`\^=\other
6291  %
6292  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
6293  \catcode`\~=\other
6294  \catcode`\[=\other
6295  \catcode`\]=\other
6296  \catcode`\"=\other
6297  \catcode`\_=\other
6298  \catcode`\|=\other
6299  \catcode`\<=\other
6300  \catcode`\>=\other
6301  \catcode`\$=\other
6302  \catcode`\#=\other
6303  \catcode`\&=\other
6304  \catcode`\%=\other
6305  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
6306  %
6307  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
6308  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
6309  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
6310  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
6311  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
6312  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
6313  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
6314  \catcode`\\=\other
6315  %
6316  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
6317  {%
6318    \count1=128
6319    \def\loop{%
6320      \catcode\count1=\other
6321      \advance\count1 by 1
6322      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
6323    }%
6324  }%
6325  %
6326  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
6327  \catcode`\{=1
6328  \catcode`\}=2
6329  \catcode`\@=0
6330}
6331
6332\def\readdatafile#1{%
6333\begingroup
6334  \setupdatafile
6335  \input\jobname.#1
6336\endgroup}
6337
6338\message{insertions,}
6339% including footnotes.
6340
6341\newcount \footnoteno
6342
6343% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
6344% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
6345% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
6346% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
6347% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
6348\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
6349
6350% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
6351\let\footnotestyle=\comment
6352
6353{\catcode `\@=11
6354%
6355% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
6356\gdef\footnote{%
6357  \let\indent=\ptexindent
6358  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6359  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
6360  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
6361  %
6362  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
6363  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
6364  \let\@sf\empty
6365  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
6366  %
6367  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
6368  \unskip
6369  \thisfootno\@sf
6370  \dofootnote
6371}%
6372
6373% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
6374% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
6375%
6376% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
6377% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
6378% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
6379%
6380\gdef\dofootnote{%
6381  \insert\footins\bgroup
6382  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
6383  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
6384  % So reset some parameters.
6385  \hsize=\pagewidth
6386  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
6387  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
6388  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
6389  \floatingpenalty\@MM
6390  \leftskip\z@skip
6391  \rightskip\z@skip
6392  \spaceskip\z@skip
6393  \xspaceskip\z@skip
6394  \parindent\defaultparindent
6395  %
6396  \smallfonts \rm
6397  %
6398  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
6399  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
6400  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
6401  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
6402  \let\noindent = \relax
6403  %
6404  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
6405  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
6406  \everypar = {\hang}%
6407  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
6408  %
6409  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
6410  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
6411  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
6412  \footstrut
6413  \futurelet\next\fo@t
6414}
6415}%end \catcode `\@=11
6416
6417% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
6418% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
6419% would be lost.
6420% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
6421% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
6422% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
6423
6424% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
6425% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
6426% out prematurely.
6427%
6428\def\startsavinginserts{%
6429  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
6430    \let\insert\saveinsert
6431  \else
6432    \let\checkinserts\relax
6433  \fi
6434}
6435
6436% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
6437% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
6438%
6439\def\saveinsert#1{%
6440  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
6441  \afterassignment\next
6442  % swallow the left brace
6443  \let\temp =
6444}
6445\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
6446\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
6447
6448\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
6449
6450\def\placesaveins#1{%
6451  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
6452    {\box#1}%
6453}
6454
6455% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
6456{
6457  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
6458  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
6459}
6460
6461% initialization:
6462\def\newsaveins #1{%
6463  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
6464  \next
6465}
6466\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
6467  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
6468  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
6469    \checksaveins #1}%
6470}
6471
6472% initialize:
6473\let\checkinserts\empty
6474\newsaveins\footins
6475\newsaveins\margin
6476
6477
6478% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
6479% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
6480%
6481% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
6482% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
6483% undone and the next image would fail.
6484\openin 1 = epsf.tex
6485\ifeof 1 \else
6486  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
6487  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
6488  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
6489  \input epsf.tex
6490\fi
6491\closein 1
6492%
6493% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
6494\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
6495\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
6496  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
6497  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
6498%
6499\def\image#1{%
6500  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
6501    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
6502      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
6503      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
6504      \global\warnednoepsftrue
6505    \fi
6506  \else
6507    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
6508  \fi
6509}
6510%
6511% Arguments to @image:
6512% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
6513% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
6514% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
6515% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
6516% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
6517\newif\ifimagevmode
6518\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
6519  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
6520  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
6521  % If the image is by itself, center it.
6522  \ifvmode
6523    \imagevmodetrue
6524    \nobreak\bigskip
6525    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
6526    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
6527    % above and below.
6528    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
6529    \nobreak
6530    \line\bgroup
6531  \fi
6532  %
6533  % Output the image.
6534  \ifpdf
6535    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6536  \else
6537    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
6538    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
6539    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
6540    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
6541  \fi
6542  %
6543  \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
6544\endgroup}
6545
6546
6547% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
6548% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
6549% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
6550%
6551\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
6552
6553% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
6554\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
6555
6556% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
6557% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
6558% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
6559%
6560% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
6561% be referable.
6562%
6563% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
6564% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
6565%
6566% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
6567% chapter-level command.
6568\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
6569%
6570\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
6571  \let\thiscaption=\empty
6572  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
6573  %
6574  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
6575  %
6576  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
6577  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
6578  %
6579  \startsavinginserts
6580  %
6581  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
6582  \par
6583  %
6584  \vtop\bgroup
6585    \def\floattype{#1}%
6586    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
6587    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
6588    %
6589    \ifx\floattype\empty
6590      \let\safefloattype=\empty
6591    \else
6592      {%
6593        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6594        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6595        \indexnofonts
6596        \turnoffactive
6597        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6598      }%
6599    \fi
6600    %
6601    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
6602    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6603      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
6604      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
6605      %
6606      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
6607      \global\advance\floatno by 1
6608      %
6609      {%
6610        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
6611        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
6612        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
6613        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
6614        % lists of floats.
6615        %
6616        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
6617        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
6618      }%
6619    \fi
6620    %
6621    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
6622    \vskip\parskip
6623    %
6624    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
6625    \restorefirstparagraphindent
6626}
6627
6628% we have these possibilities:
6629% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
6630% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
6631% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
6632% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
6633% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
6634% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
6635% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
6636% @float & no caption:
6637%
6638\def\Efloat{%
6639    \let\floatident = \empty
6640    %
6641    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
6642    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
6643    %
6644    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
6645    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6646      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
6647        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
6648      \fi
6649      % the number.
6650      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6651    \fi
6652    %
6653    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
6654    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
6655    \let\captionline = \floatident
6656    %
6657    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
6658      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
6659	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
6660      \fi
6661      %
6662      % caption text.
6663      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
6664    \fi
6665    %
6666    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
6667    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
6668    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
6669      \vskip.5\parskip
6670      \captionline
6671      %
6672      % Space below caption.
6673      \vskip\parskip
6674    \fi
6675    %
6676    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
6677    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
6678    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6679      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
6680      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
6681      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
6682      {%
6683        \atdummies
6684        %
6685        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
6686        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
6687        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
6688	\scanexp{%
6689	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
6690	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
6691	      \thiscaption
6692	    \else
6693	      \thisshortcaption
6694	    \fi
6695	  }%
6696	}%
6697        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
6698	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
6699      }%
6700    \fi
6701  \egroup  % end of \vtop
6702  %
6703  % place the captured inserts
6704  %
6705  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
6706  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
6707  % float. --kasal, 26may04
6708  %
6709  \checkinserts
6710}
6711
6712% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
6713%
6714\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
6715  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
6716}
6717
6718% @caption, @shortcaption
6719%
6720\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
6721\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
6722\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
6723\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
6724
6725% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
6726% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
6727\def\getfloatno#1{%
6728  \ifx#1\relax
6729      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
6730      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
6731      %
6732      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
6733      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
6734        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
6735  \fi
6736  \let\floatno#1%
6737}
6738
6739% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
6740% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
6741% first read the @float command.
6742%
6743\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6744
6745% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
6746% distinguish floats from other xref types.
6747\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
6748
6749% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
6750% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
6751% \thissection value which we \setref above.
6752%
6753\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
6754%
6755% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
6756% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
6757%
6758\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
6759  \def\temp{#1}%
6760  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
6761  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
6762}
6763
6764% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
6765%
6766\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
6767  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
6768  {%
6769    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6770    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6771    \indexnofonts
6772    \turnoffactive
6773    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6774  }%
6775  %
6776  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
6777  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
6778    \ifhavexrefs
6779      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
6780      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
6781    \fi
6782  \else
6783    \begingroup
6784      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
6785      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
6786      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
6787    \endgroup
6788  \fi
6789}
6790
6791% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
6792% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
6793% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
6794% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
6795%
6796% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
6797% they won't appear in the aux file).
6798%
6799\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
6800\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
6801  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
6802  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
6803  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
6804  % in pdf output.
6805  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
6806  %
6807  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
6808  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
6809  \writeentry
6810}}
6811
6812\message{localization,}
6813% and i18n.
6814
6815% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
6816% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
6817% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
6818% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
6819%
6820\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
6821  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
6822    % Read the file if it exists.
6823    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
6824    \ifeof 1
6825      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
6826      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
6827    \else
6828      \input txi-#1.tex
6829    \fi
6830    \closein 1
6831  \endgroup
6832}
6833\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
6834is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
6835should work if nowhere else does.}
6836
6837
6838% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
6839% likely, but for now just recognize it.
6840\let\documentencoding = \comment
6841
6842
6843% Page size parameters.
6844%
6845\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
6846
6847\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
6848\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
6849\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
6850
6851% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
6852\vbadness = 10000
6853
6854% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
6855\hbadness = 2000
6856
6857% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
6858\widowpenalty=10000
6859\clubpenalty=10000
6860
6861% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
6862% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
6863% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
6864% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
6865%
6866\def\setemergencystretch{%
6867  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
6868    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
6869    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
6870  \else
6871    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
6872  \fi
6873}
6874
6875% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
6876% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
6877% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
6878%
6879% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
6880% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
6881%
6882\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
6883  \voffset = #3\relax
6884  \topskip = #6\relax
6885  \splittopskip = \topskip
6886  %
6887  \vsize = #1\relax
6888  \advance\vsize by \topskip
6889  \outervsize = \vsize
6890  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
6891  \pageheight = \vsize
6892  %
6893  \hsize = #2\relax
6894  \outerhsize = \hsize
6895  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
6896  \pagewidth = \hsize
6897  %
6898  \normaloffset = #4\relax
6899  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
6900  %
6901  \ifpdf
6902    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
6903    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
6904  \fi
6905  %
6906  \setleading{\textleading}
6907  %
6908  \parindent = \defaultparindent
6909  \setemergencystretch
6910}
6911
6912% @letterpaper (the default).
6913\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6914  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6915  \textleading = 13.2pt
6916  %
6917  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
6918  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
6919                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6920                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
6921                    {11in}{8.5in}%
6922}}
6923
6924% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
6925\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6926  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
6927  \textleading = 12pt
6928  %
6929  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
6930                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6931                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
6932                    {9.25in}{7in}%
6933  %
6934  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
6935  \tolerance = 700
6936  \hfuzz = 1pt
6937  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6938  \defbodyindent = .5cm
6939}}
6940
6941% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
6942% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
6943\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6944  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
6945  \textleading = 12pt
6946  %
6947  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
6948                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
6949                    {0pt}{14pt}%
6950                    {9in}{6in}%
6951  %
6952  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
6953  \tolerance = 700
6954  \hfuzz = 1pt
6955  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6956  \defbodyindent = .4cm
6957}}
6958
6959% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
6960\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6961  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6962  \textleading = 13.2pt
6963  %
6964  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
6965  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
6966  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
6967  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
6968  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
6969  % your texinfo source file like this:
6970  % @tex
6971  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
6972  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
6973  % @end tex
6974  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
6975                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6976                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6977                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6978  %
6979  \tolerance = 700
6980  \hfuzz = 1pt
6981  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6982  \defbodyindent = 5mm
6983}}
6984
6985% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
6986% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
6987% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
6988\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6989  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
6990  \textleading = 12.5pt
6991  %
6992  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
6993                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6994                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
6995                    {210mm}{148mm}%
6996  %
6997  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
6998  \tolerance = 800
6999  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
7000  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
7001  \defbodyindent = 2mm
7002  \tableindent = 12mm
7003}}
7004
7005% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
7006\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
7007  \afourpaper
7008  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
7009                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
7010                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
7011                    {297mm}{210mm}%
7012  %
7013  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
7014  \globaldefs = 0
7015}}
7016
7017% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
7018\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
7019  \afourpaper
7020  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
7021                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
7022                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
7023                    {297mm}{210mm}%
7024  \globaldefs = 0
7025}}
7026
7027% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
7028% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
7029% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
7030%
7031\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
7032\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
7033  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
7034  \globaldefs = 1
7035  %
7036  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
7037  \setleading{\textleading}%
7038  %
7039  \dimen0 = #1
7040  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
7041  %
7042  \dimen2 = \hsize
7043  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
7044  %
7045  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
7046                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
7047                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
7048                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
7049}}
7050
7051% Set default to letter.
7052%
7053\letterpaper
7054
7055
7056\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
7057
7058% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
7059\catcode`\"=\other
7060\catcode`\~=\other
7061\catcode`\^=\other
7062\catcode`\_=\other
7063\catcode`\|=\other
7064\catcode`\<=\other
7065\catcode`\>=\other
7066\catcode`\+=\other
7067\catcode`\$=\other
7068\def\normaldoublequote{"}
7069\def\normaltilde{~}
7070\def\normalcaret{^}
7071\def\normalunderscore{_}
7072\def\normalverticalbar{|}
7073\def\normalless{<}
7074\def\normalgreater{>}
7075\def\normalplus{+}
7076\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
7077
7078% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
7079% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
7080% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
7081%
7082% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
7083% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
7084% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
7085% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
7086%
7087\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
7088
7089% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
7090% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
7091% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
7092% this is not a problem.
7093\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
7094
7095% Turn off all special characters except @
7096% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
7097% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
7098% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
7099
7100\catcode`\"=\active
7101\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
7102\let"=\activedoublequote
7103\catcode`\~=\active
7104\def~{{\tt\char126}}
7105\chardef\hat=`\^
7106\catcode`\^=\active
7107\def^{{\tt \hat}}
7108
7109\catcode`\_=\active
7110\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
7111\let\realunder=_
7112% Subroutine for the previous macro.
7113\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
7114
7115\catcode`\|=\active
7116\def|{{\tt\char124}}
7117\chardef \less=`\<
7118\catcode`\<=\active
7119\def<{{\tt \less}}
7120\chardef \gtr=`\>
7121\catcode`\>=\active
7122\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
7123\catcode`\+=\active
7124\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
7125\catcode`\$=\active
7126\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
7127
7128% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
7129% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
7130% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
7131% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
7132\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
7133
7134% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
7135% parsing them.
7136\def\turnoffactive{%
7137  \normalturnoffactive
7138  \otherbackslash
7139}
7140
7141\catcode`\@=0
7142
7143% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
7144% as in \char`\\.
7145\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
7146\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
7147
7148% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
7149% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
7150{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
7151
7152% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
7153% in fixed width font.
7154\catcode`\\=\active
7155@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
7156% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
7157%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
7158
7159% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
7160% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
7161% catcode other.
7162@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
7163@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
7164
7165% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
7166% the literal character `\'.
7167%
7168@def@normalturnoffactive{%
7169  @let\=@normalbackslash
7170  @let"=@normaldoublequote
7171  @let~=@normaltilde
7172  @let^=@normalcaret
7173  @let_=@normalunderscore
7174  @let|=@normalverticalbar
7175  @let<=@normalless
7176  @let>=@normalgreater
7177  @let+=@normalplus
7178  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
7179  @unsepspaces
7180}
7181
7182% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
7183% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
7184@otherifyactive
7185
7186% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
7187% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
7188% a backslash.
7189%
7190@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
7191@global@let\ = @eatinput
7192
7193% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
7194% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
7195% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
7196% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
7197% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
7198%
7199@gdef@fixbackslash{%
7200  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
7201  @catcode`+=@active
7202  @catcode`@_=@active
7203}
7204
7205% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
7206@escapechar = `@@
7207
7208% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
7209@catcode`@& = @other
7210@catcode`@# = @other
7211@catcode`@% = @other
7212
7213
7214@c Local variables:
7215@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
7216@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
7217@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
7218@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
7219@c time-stamp-end: "}"
7220@c End:
7221
7222@c vim:sw=2:
7223
7224@ignore
7225   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
7226@end ignore
7227